HTR-6025
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
Important safety instructions
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Important safety instructions
Caution-ii En
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution-iii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit
in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from
the wall outlet.
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This
state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit
is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
English
Features ................................................................... 2
Getting started ........................................................ 3
Quick start guide .................................................... 4
Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4
Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components............................................ 6
Step 3: Turn on the power
and press SCENE 1 button .................................... 8
What do you want to do with this unit? ..................... 9
Connections ........................................................... 10
Rear panel ................................................................ 10
Placing speakers....................................................... 11
Connecting speakers ................................................ 12
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14
Connecting video components................................. 15
Connecting audio components................................. 17
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18
Connecting the power cable..................................... 18
Turning on and off the power .................................. 18
Front panel display .................................................. 19
Basic setup ............................................................. 21
Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 23
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 23
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 26
Playback ................................................................ 27
Basic operations....................................................... 27
Additional operations............................................... 28
Sound field programs ........................................... 31
Sound field program descriptions ............................ 31
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 34
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 34
Manual tuning .......................................................... 34
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 35
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 35
Selecting preset stations........................................... 36
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 36
Recording .............................................................. 37
Set menu .................................................................38
Using set menu ........................................................ 39
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 40
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 43
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 45
Remote control features........................................46
Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 46
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 47
Setting remote control codes ................................... 49
Advanced setup......................................................50
Troubleshooting.....................................................51
Glossary..................................................................56
Specifications .........................................................58
Index .......................................................................59
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
•“
1
STANDBY/ON” or “
A
MULTI CH IN” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the appendix
pages at the end of this manual for the information about
each position of the parts.
•
The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
Features
2 En
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 100 W + 100 W
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W + 100 W
SCENE select function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability
Decoders and DSP circuits
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-
channel surround sound
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Dolby Digital decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder
◆ DTS decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Ya maha and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
Features
Getting started
3 En
INTRODUCTION
English
■ Checking the supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the
models.
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code.
Getting started
Note
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
V-AUX
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Notes
1
3
2
Quick start guide
4 En
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy
DVD movie playback in your home theater.
In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ Indoor FM antenna
❏ AM loop antenna
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2
❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1
❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5
❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ................................................. 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ................................................ 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
Video monitor
DVD player
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞
P. 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
☞
P. 6
☞
P. 8
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
5 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with
a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped
(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of
your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”
(black) terminals.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front speakers
Center and surround speakers
4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input
jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack of this unit.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
LR LR
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
LR
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
SUB
WO
O
FER
IN
OU
T
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OU
T
(REC)
IN
(
PLAY)
12 3 4
To the front right
speaker
Front left speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
To the surround
left speaker
To the center
speaker
To the surround
right speaker
Press down
Insert
Release
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
MD/
CD-R
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
Subwoofer cable
Input jack
AV receiverSubwoofer
Quick start guide
6 En
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and the
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the video input
jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
LR LR
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
LR
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
SUB
WO
O
FER
IN
OU
T
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OU
T
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV receiver
L/MONO
AUDIO AUDIO
COLOR STREAM HD
VIDEO
VIDEO-1 IN IN
S-VIDEO
RYP
B
P
R
RL/MONO
Video monitor AV receiver
Video input
jack
Video cable
VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jack
Quick start guide
7 En
INTRODUCTION
English
4 Connect the FM and AM antennas to this
unit.
See page 18 for the details.
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and
you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal.
5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Open the lever Insert Close the lever
■ For further connections
• Using the other kind of speaker
combinations
☞
P. 11
• Connecting a video monitor and
DVD player
☞
P. 15
• Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and
DVD recorder
☞
P. 15
• Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
☞
P. 16
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
☞
P. 16
• Connecting a CD player and an MD
recorder
☞
P. 17
• Connecting a DVD player via analog
multi-channel audio connection
☞
P. 17
• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna
☞
P. 18
Quick start guide
8 En
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel.
3 Press
F
SCENE 1.
“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,
and this unit automatically optimize own status for
the DVD playback.
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
5 Rotate
8
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
When you change the input source or sound field program, the
SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE
button turns off.
■ Using the other SCENE buttons
In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding
SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources.
Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the
connected DVD player as the back ground
music for this room...”
Press
F
SCENE 2 (or
E
SCENE 2) to select
“Disc Listening”.
Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”
Press
F
SCENE 3 (or
E
SCENE 3) to select
“TV Viewing”.
To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a
cable TV or satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See
page 15 for details.
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 13).
Note
Note
Quick start guide
9 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from
the FM radio station...”
Press
F
SCENE 4 (or
E
SCENE 4) to select
“Radio Listening”.
• To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into
the desired radio station in advance. See pages 34 to 36 for
tuning information.
• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the
connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the
end of the indoor FM antenna.
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See
page 23 for details.
■ After using this unit...
Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit
from the standby mode, press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
L
POWER) on the front panel. See page 18 for details.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power
in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Notes
Note
What do you want to do with this
unit?
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
• Using various SCENE templates
☞
P. 23
■ Using various input sources
• Basic controls of this unit
☞
P. 27
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
☞
P. 34
■ Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞
P. 31
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Optimizing the speaker parameters for your
listening room (BASIC SETUP)
☞
P. 21
• Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit
☞
P. 38
• Setting the remote control
☞
P. 46
• Adjusts the advanced parameters
☞
P. 50
■ Additional features
Automatically turning off this unit
☞
P. 30
Connections
10 En
1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See page 16 for connection information.
2 VIDEO jacks
See page 15 for connection information.
3 ANTENNA terminals
See page 18 for connection information.
4 SPEAKERS terminals
See page 12 for connection information.
5 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
6 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
7 AUDIO jacks
See pages 15 and 17 for connection information.
8 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 12 for connection information.
Connections
Rear panel
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
L
R
L
R
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
L
R
DVD
DT
V
/CBL
D
VR
C
D
S
UB
W
OOF
ER
IN
O
UT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
M
D
/
CD-R
O
UT
(
R
E
C
)
IN
(PLAY)
1
5 6 7 8
2 3 4
11 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-
channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
FL
C
SL
SR
SW
1.8 m (6 ft)
12 En
Connections
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS
terminal
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the bare wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
LR LR
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
LR
DVD
DT
V
/CBL
D
VR
C
D
S
UB
W
OOF
E
R
IN
O
UT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
M
D/
CD-R
O
UT
(
R
E
C
)
IN
(PLAY
)
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Front speakers (B)
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front speakers (A)
LeftRight
LeftRight
10 mm (3/8”)
13 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals
1 Loosen the knob.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER,
and SURROUND terminals
1 Press down the tab.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Release the tab to secure the wire.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 18 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
A
PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to
select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω
MIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω
MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
Note
SP IMP.- 8 MIN
SP IMP.- 6 MIN
14 En
Connections
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with
digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)
and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on
separate wires of component video cables.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Notes
PR
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
15 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Connect the video components as follows.
y
You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV,
and cable TV to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO
connection (see page 16).
■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD
player
■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner
and a DVD recorder
Connecting video components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
AN
AUDIO
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
C
L
R
VV
DVD player
Video monitor
Video in
Video out
Audio out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTEN
N
AUDIO
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD DVR
IN OUT
DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
I
N
(P
L
A
L
R
L
R
L
R
VVV
O
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Audio out
Video out
Audio out
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
16 En
Connections
■ Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your
video monitor and video source components to this unit
using COMPONENT VIDEO connection.
Be sure to connect your video source components in the same
way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if
you connect your video monitor to this unit using a
COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video source
components to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO
connection.
■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on
the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take
priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.
Note
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
L
R
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
DVD player
Video monitor
Video out
Video out
Video out
Video in
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO S ELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
V
L
R
Game console or
video camera
3.5 mm
stereo mini
plug
Video
output
Audio
output
17 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Connect the audio components as follows.
■ Connecting a CD player and a CD
recorder/MD recorder
When you connect your CD player via analog and digital
connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL
INPUT jack.
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for
discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks
on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 28), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system
before using this feature.
Connecting audio components
Note
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
CD
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
B
Y
DVD DVR
FM
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBL MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
CD player CD recorder or
MD recorder
Audio outAudio out Audio inAudio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
MULTI CH INPUT
L
1
2
R
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
COAXIAL
DTV/
CBL
DVD
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Surround out
Center out
Subwoofer out
Front out
Notes
18 En
Connections
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable
into the AC wall outlet.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
L
POWER) to turn
on this unit.
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
■ Set this unit to the standby mode
Press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
M
STANDBY) to set
this unit to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Notes
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
M
D
/
C
D
-R
IN
(P
LAY)
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Ground
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of
vinyl-covered wire extended
outdoors from a window.
Connecting the power cable
Turning on and off the power
Power cable
To the AC wall outlet
19 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
1 Decoder indicator
Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions.
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 31).
3 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 33).
4 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 33).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode
(see page 34).
7 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 28).
8 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
9 PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
0 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 28).
A SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected
(see page 27).
B NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see
page 28).
C CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 31).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 31).
D Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
E SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 30).
F Input channel and speaker indicators
LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE
signal.
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Front panel display
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
q PL
q PL
ENHANCER
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
AUTO
PRESET
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
09 B ED
F
C
5
4 6 81 2 3 7
A
Input channel indicators
LFE
LCR
SL SR
LFE indicator
20 En
Connections
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
X
Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 49.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
30º 30º
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Basic setup
21 En
PREPARATION
English
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU”
(see page 40).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 40).
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
• Press HRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
1 Press
D
AMP on the remote control.
2 Press
P
MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
G
ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
“ROOM” appears in the front panel display.
ROOM: S >M L
4 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting.
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
Choices: S, M, L
S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m
2
)
5 Press Gn to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
Gl / h to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NONE
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
6 Press Gn to select “SPEAKERS” and then
Gl / h to select the number of speakers
connected to this unit.
Basic setup
Notes
BASIC SETUP
.
Choice Display Speakers
2spk
Front L/R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
SUBWOOFER
..
YES
SPEAKERS
..
5spk
LR
LCR
LR
SL SR
LCR
SL SR
22 En
Basic setup
7 Press
G
n to select “SET” and then
G
l / h
to select the desired setting.
SET >CANCEL
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to apply the settings you made.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
You can also press
P
MENU to cancel the setup procedure.
8 Press
G
ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs
a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears
in the front panel display for a few seconds and then
“CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display.
y
• Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.
• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test
tone flashes in the front panel display.
9 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NO
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu to balance the output level of
each speaker.
10 Press
G
ENTER to confirm your selection.
• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top set menu display.
• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker
level adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
11 Press Gk / n to select a speaker and then
Gl / h to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
•Press h to increase the value.
•Press l to decrease the value.
FR ----||----
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
12 Press
P
MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”.
CHECK:TestTone
CHECK OK?
..
YES
Note
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
23 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit is equipped with 12 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
each SCENE button:
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing
SCENE 2: Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the desired
F
SCENE (or
E
SCENE) button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently
assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel
display.
2 Press
D
INPUT l / h (or press
D
AMP and
then
G
l / h) to select the desired template.
3 Press the
F
SCENE (or
E
SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
button.
• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from
the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically
canceled.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 46 for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Selecting the desired SCENE
template
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE template
Assign the
SCENE template
to the SCENE
button
1
1
1
or
Remote control
Flashes
3 seconds
3 seconds
Front panel
DVD Viewing
Notes
l INPUT h
AMP
ENTER
or
Front panel
Remote control
DVD MovieView
1
1
or
Remote controlFront panel
24 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 26 for details.
Radio Listening
CD Listening
CD Music Listening
DVD Live Viewing
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Viewing
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
DVR Viewing
TV Viewing
TV Sports Viewing
Game Playing
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
TUNER (FM/AM)
CD
DVD
DVR
Video sources
(DVD video,
Recorded video)
TV programs
Video games
Radio programs
Music discs (CD,
SA-CD or DVD-Audio)
SCENE templates
Which component do you
like for playback?
Which source do you like to
play back?
1
2
4
3
Default SCENE
buttons
25 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ Preset SCENE template descriptions
SCENE template
Features
Input source Playback mode
DVD Viewing
(SCENE 1 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents
on your DVD player.
DVD STRAIGHT
DVD Movie Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
DVD player.
DVD Movie Dramatic
DVD Live Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on
your DVD player.
DVD Pop/Rock
DVR Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
digital video recorder.
DVR Movie Dramatic
Music Disc Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your DVD player.
DVD 2ch Stereo
Disc Listening
(SCENE 2 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as
the back ground music on your DVD player.
DVD 5ch Stereo
CD Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your CD player.
CD 2ch Stereo
CD Music Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as
the back ground music on your CD player.
CD 5ch Stereo
Radio Listening
(SCENE 4 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
TUNER
MUSIC ENHANCER
5ch STEREO
TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs.
DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
TV Sports Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on
TV.
DTV/CBL TV Sports
Game Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play video games.
V-AUX Game
26 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 12 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
■ Customizing the preset SCENE
templates
Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.
1 Press and hold the desired
E
SCENE button
for 3 seconds and then press
D
AMP.
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the front panel display.
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
assigned to any of the
E
SCENE button, press
G
l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see
page 23).
2 Press
G
k / n to select the desired parameter
of the SCENE template and then
G
l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• The input source component
• The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT
mode
• The night listening mode setting (see page 28)
− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
3 Press the
E
SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
• After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the
E
SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the
SCENE template on the remote control. See page 46 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each
E
SCENE button, and if you create another customized
SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized
SCENE template with the new one.
• The customized SCENE template is only available for the
assigned
E
SCENE button.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Note
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the SCENE
template to the SCENE
button
Create an original SCENE
template
1
3 seconds
AMP
Notes
1
PLAYBACK
27 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
9
SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the
front speakers you want to use.
The respective speaker indicators lights up in the
front panel display.
3 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
C
)) to
select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the selected component or
select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 34 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
5 Rotate
8
VOLUME (or press
Q
VOLUME +/
–) to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
6 Press
A
PROGRAM l / h (or press
D
AMP
and then press
I
PROG l / h) repeatedly to
select the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display.
See page 31 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 28).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 33).
• To display information about the currently selected input source
in the front panel display, see page 30 for details.
■ Guide to contents
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
Basic operations
INPUT:DVD
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Available input source
Currently selected input source
Notes
When you want to...
See
page
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 29
Edit parameters of sound field programs 32
Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at
night
28
Use headphones 28
Select a decoder to play back sources with 32
Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 30
Movie Dramatic
Currently selected
surround field program
28 En
Playback
■ Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 33).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
■ Muting the audio output
Press
N
MUTE to mute the audio output.
Press
N
MUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate
8
VOLUME (or press
Q
VOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in
“SOUND MENU” (see page 43).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
■ Selecting the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input
source
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input
source.
Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
A
MULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in
the front panel display.
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 44).
• Sound field programs mode cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source.
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the
front left and right channels.
■ Selecting the night listening mode
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
K
NIGHT
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC,
NIGHT OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic
range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to
hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-of-
listening for all sounds.
• Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this
feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
Additional operations
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
Notes
29 En
Playback
BASIC
OPERATION
English
2 Press
G
l / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed in the front panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
■ Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 45).
Press
E
AUDIO SELECT (or
B
AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack
select setting.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack are
assigned to the currently selected input source.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
Press
0
TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press
A
PROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding
frequency response level.
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response.
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.
■ Adjusting speaker levels during
playback
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source.
This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP
LEVEL” (see page 41).
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
F
LEVEL
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
Once you press FLEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing
G
k / n.
2 Press
G
l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB.
y
You can press
4
A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output level.
Notes
Note
A.SEL:AUTO
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Audio input jack
select setting
Notes
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
30 En
Playback
■ Displaying the signal information
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
P
MENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
;BASIC SETUP
2 Press
G
k / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press
G
ENTER.
3 Press
G
k / n to switch the displayed
information.
The following information about the input source
appears in the front panel display.
4 Press
P
MENU to exit.
■ Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time.
Press
D
AMP and then press
O
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press
O
SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
y
• To cancel the sleep timer, press
O
SLEEP on the remote
control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front
panel display.
• You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing
1
STANDBY/ON (or
M
STANDBY) to set this unit to the
standby mode.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
Display Description
FORMAT
Signal format.
SAMPL.
The number of samples per second taken
from a continuous signal to make a discrete
signal.
CH
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE).
B.RATE
The number of bits passing a given point
per second.
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital,
or PCM signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
Audio sources
Video sources
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MULTI CH IN
DVD
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
31 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital
decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback
from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.
Press
A
PROGRAM l / h (or press
D
AMP and
then press
I
PROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 28).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 33).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
• You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by
pressing
T
ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly.
The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the
actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the
front, back, left and right.
Sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
Category Program Features
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The
sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of
vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments.
Hall
HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program
uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful
reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.
Jazz
HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music.
It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.
ENTERTAIN
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games.
The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where
you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies.
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with
a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come
clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a
comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.
MOVIE
Movie Spacious
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular
sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic
range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.
Movie Dramatic
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-
dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound
effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center
orientation of voices as pivots.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.
5ch Stereo
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for
background music at parties.
ENHANCER
Music Enh. 2ch
Music Enh. 5ch
Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or
5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact.
Note
32 En
Sound field programs
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
Press
D
AMP and then press
J
SUR. DECODE
repeatedly to select a decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Editing sound fields parameters
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 While listening to a source, press
D
AMP
and then press Gk / n to select the desired
parameter.
2 Press Gl / h to change the parameter
value.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEM. GUARD” in
“OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 45).
y
Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,
Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:
DSP level DSP LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
For PRO LOGIC II Music:
Panorama PANORAMA
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers
for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
Dimension DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field
either towards the front or towards the
rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards
the front), initial setting is STD
(standard).
Center width CT WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all
three front speakers to varying
degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and
right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center
channel sound is output only from
front left and right speakers), initial
setting is 3.
For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch
Effect level
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: LOW, HIGH
STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Note
33 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■
Using sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers by creating
virtual speakers.
If you set “SUR. LR”
to “NONE” (see page 40), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see
page 31).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. LR” is
set to “NONE” (see page 40) in the following cases:
– when “5ch Stereo” (see page 31) is selected.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 31). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 28).
■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing. 2-
channel stereo sources are output from only the front left
and right speakers.
Press
B
STRAIGHT (or press
D
AMP and then
S
STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
B
STRAIGHT (or
S
STRAIGHT) again so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
Note
Note
FM/AM TUNING
34 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
automatic tuning is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/
TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
manual tuning is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/
TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
You can hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Automatic tuning
AUTO
A
AM
1440
kHz
Lights up
No colon (:)
AUTO
TUNED
A
AM
1530
kHz
Lights up
Manual tuning
Note
A
AM
1440
kHz
No colon (:)
35 En
FM/AM tuning
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select “FM” as the
reception band.
3 Press and hold
6
MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can select the preset station group and the preset station
number where the first received station will be stored by pressing
4
A/B/C/D/E and then
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See page 34 for tuning instructions.
2 Press
6
MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 10 seconds.
3 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E and
5
PRESET/
TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
6
MEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Automatic preset tuning
Notes
Flashes
Flash
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Manual preset tuning
Notes
TUNED
MEMORY
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
Preset station number
Flashes
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
TUNED
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
36 En
FM/AM tuning
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, press
C
TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E (or
G
A/B/C/D/E l / h)
repeatedly to select the desired preset
station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
G
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
y
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
4
A/B/C/D/E
and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
2 Press and hold
2
PRESET/TUNING for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using
4
A/B/C/D/
E and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
4 Press
2
PRESET/TUNING again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Exchanging preset stations
MEMORY
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
:
A5
FM
90.7
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
RECORDING
37 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 29) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 29) and the sound field programs
(see page 31) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if
your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is
turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press
D
INPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (C)) to
select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Set menu
38 En
You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit
operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 21).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Set menu
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover
frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals.
40
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
41
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the distance of each speaker.
42
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
42
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
42
F)D.RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
42
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume
level.
43
Parameter Features Page
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
43
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
44
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
44
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the
rear panel of this unit.
44
E)MULTI CH SET
Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
44
39 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 30).
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
P
MENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press
G
k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press
G
ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
“1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
G
k / n repeatedly and then press
G
ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following menus appear in the front panel
display as you press
G
k / n repeatedly.
5 Press
G
k / n repeatedly and then press
G
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
• Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the
items you want to adjust.
• To return to the previous menu level, press
H
RETURN.
6 Press
G
k / n to select the desired parameter
and then
G
l / h to change the parameter
value.
•Press G h to increase the value.
•Press G l to decrease the value.
7 Press
P
MENU to exit from set menu.
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
45
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings.
45
C)AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
45
D)PARAM. INI
Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings.
45
Using set menu
BASIC SETUP
.
MANUAL SETUP
.
1 SOUND MENU
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
40 En
Set menu
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the FRONT B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off
when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT
A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the
speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are
muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B
terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode (see page 33).
Front speakers FRONT
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
When the front speakers are large
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the front speakers are small
Select “SMALL” (small).
When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 41), you can
select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is
set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit
automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.
Center speaker CENTER
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the center speaker is large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the center speaker is small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the surround speakers are large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the surround speakers are small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the surround speakers
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33).
1 SOUND MENU
Notes
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:
large
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm
(6.5 in): small
Note
41 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
LFE/Bass out BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT” setting (see page 40).
When you do not use a subwoofer
Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels,
and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left
and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting
(see page 40).
Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 39 and 40). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 39 and 40).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NRM, REV
• Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase
of your subwoofer.
• Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FL
Front left speaker
FR
Front right speaker
C
Center speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
42 En
Set menu
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
y
Press
G
k / n to select a frequency band and
G
l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the
frequency band.
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and
front left speakers.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker LFE SP LFE
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone LFE HP LFE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 41), some
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)D.RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Speaker dynamic range SP D.R
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone dynamic range HP D.R
Adjusts the headphone compression.
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
Note
100Hz--||-- 0
43 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Mute type MUTE TYP.
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 28).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This
feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by
mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16 dB
to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB,
the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB.
Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB
Control step: 5 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume”
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX
VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set
to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of
this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB
Control step: 1 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting.
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input
mode or rename the input source.
■ Input assignment
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs. Change the following
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using
D
INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control).
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1
IN (1)
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3
IN (2)
IN (3)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
You cannot select a specific item more than once.
Note
Note
2 INPUT MENU
Note
44 En
Set menu
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the front panel display.
The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed
“My DVD”.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (
C
)
or
A
MULTI CH IN to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press
D
AMP and then press
G
l / h on the
remote control to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press
G
k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press
G
l / h to move
to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press
G
n to change the character in the following order,
or press Gk to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press
P
MENU to exit from “INPUT
RENAME”.
■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,
DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used the connected input
source.
DTS decoder prioritize setting
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.
■ Multi channel input setup
E)MULTI CH SET
BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD
y
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last
selected video source as the background video source.
Notes
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD My DVD
MULTI CH IN
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
45 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Control step: 1
•Press
G
l to make the front panel display dimmer.
•Press
G
h to make the front panel display brighter.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Memory guard MEM.GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM. GUARD” feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– sound field program parameters
– all set menu items
– all speaker levels
– SCENE template parameters
When “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and
adjust any other set menu items.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source (see page 29).
■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field
programs to the initial factory settings.
Choices: NO, YES
• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and
return to the previous menu level.
• Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to
the initial factory settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”.
3 OPTION MENU
Note
Notes
Remote control features
46 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 49).
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 49).
1 Press the desired
E
SCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 48
for details of the function of each button.
■ Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Press and hold the
E
SCENE button and the
desired input selector button (C) for 3 seconds.
y
Press the
E
SCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
Remote control features
Using remote control on the SCENE feature
Note
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AU X
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
*
SCENE buttons
47 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Controlling this unit
Press
D
AMP to control this unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when
D
AMP is pressed.
■ Controlling a TV
Press
C
DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
DTV/CBL (see page 49).
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether
you press
C
DTV/CBL or not.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when
C
DTV/CBL is
pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on
page 48.
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AU X
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
*1
*2
AMP
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AU X
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
*1
*2
DTV/CBL
48 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to
control other components. You must set the appropriate
remote control code for each input source in advance (see
page 49). The following table shows the function of each
control button used to control other components assigned
to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 9 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 9
different components.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 49).
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
DVD
V-AU X
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
AVTV
SCENE
4321
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCER
l
PROG
h
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
2
8
9
7
3
4
6
5
1
Remote control
DVD player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
1 AV POWER
Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 TITLE
Title Band
3 PRESET/CH k
Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8)
PRESET/CH n Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
A/B/C/D/E l Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E h Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
ENTER Enter Enter
4 RETURN
Return Return
5 REC
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play
w Search backward Search backward
Search backward
*2
Search backward Search backward Search backward
f Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*2
Search forward Search forward Search forward
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop
6 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
7 MENU
Menu Menu
8 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display
9 ENT
Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
Notes
49 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 While pressing and holding one of the input
selector buttons (C) on the remote control to
select the input area you want to set up,
press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (
V
) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
Setting remote control codes
Input
source
Component
category
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD YAMAHA 5013
MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007
DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000
DTV/CBL – – –
V-AUX TUNER YAMAHA 5011
DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011
TUNER YAMAHA 5009
TUNER YAMAHA 5012
Note
Notes
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
POWER
AV
While holding down
Press for 3 seconds
Advanced setup
50 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your
listening environment.
•Only
1
STANDBY/ON,
A
PROGRAM
l / h and
B
STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced
setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the
advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel
display.
1 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
A
PROGRAM
l / h to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
4 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN
• Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced
setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Advanced setup
Notes
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8Ω MIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
6Ω MIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
Notes
Troubleshooting
51 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
13
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
12
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-17
No appropriate Audio input jack select has
been set.
Set an appropriate Audio input jack select.
29
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
D
INPUT
l / h on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
27, 28
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
12
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with
9
SPEAKERS.
27
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
N
MUTE or
Q
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
28
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
52 En
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance setting is correct.
13
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
N
MUTE or
Q
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
28
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-17
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
29
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”.
40
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
5ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
31
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”.
40
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
B
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
33
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
41
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
41
The source does not contain low-
frequency bass signals.
53 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
29
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
You are attempting to set the volume level
higher than the maximum volume level.
Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting.
43
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
15, 17
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEM. GUARD” in “OPTION MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEM. GUARD” to “OFF”.
45
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
54 En
Troubleshooting
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
18
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
34
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
35
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
55 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Remote control
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
1 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press
A
PROGRAM l / h to select
“PRESET”.
4 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“RESET”.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure without making any changes.
5 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced
setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making
any changes, press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“CANCEL” and then press
1
STANDBY/ON.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
20
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
49
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
49
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Notes
Glossary
56 En
■ Audio information
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right
and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1
channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
Glossary
57 En
Glossary
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP
technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of
movie theater in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field program so
that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even
without any surround speakers by using virtual surround
speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA
DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not
include a center speaker.
■ Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
Specifications
58 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 100 W
• Maximum Power (JEITA)
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 135 W
• Dynamic Power (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω)
(IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ......................................... 110/130/160/180 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Front L/R ......................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB
V-AUX to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT,
1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ...................................................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted (250 mV)......... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω).................................... 0.4 V/470 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
(2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) .................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Video Maximum Input Level.................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ..................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5%
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range.......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply......................................................... 120 V AC, 60 Hz
• Power Consumption................................................... 240 W/320 VA
• Standby Power Consumption .................................................. 0.8 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm
(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”)
• Weight .............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
INDEX
59 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Numerics
1 SOUND MENU ................................ 38
2 INPUT MENU ............................ 38, 43
2ch Stereo ............................................ 31
3 OPTION MENU ......................... 39, 45
5ch Stereo ............................................ 31
■ A
A)DISPLAY SET ................................ 45
A)INPUT ASSIGN .............................. 43
A)SPEAKER SET ............................... 40
A.DELAY ............................................ 43
Adjusting speaker levels
during playback ............................... 29
Adjusting the tonal quality ................... 29
AM tuning ............................................ 34
ANTENNA terminals .......................... 10
Audio cable plugs ................................ 14
Audio delay .......................................... 43
AUDIO jacks ................................. 10, 14
Audio jacks .......................................... 14
AUDIO SELECT ........................... 29, 45
Audio select ......................................... 45
Audio settings ...................................... 43
Automatic preset tuning ....................... 35
Automatic tuning ................................. 34
■ B
B)INPUT RENAME ............................ 44
B)MEMORY GUARD ........................ 45
B)SP LEVEL ....................................... 41
BASIC SETUP .............................. 21, 38
Basic setup ........................................... 38
BASS OUT .......................................... 41
■ C
C)SP DISTANCE ................................ 42
C)VOLUME TRIM ............................. 44
CD Listening ........................................ 25
CD Music Listening ............................. 25
CENTER .............................................. 40
Center graphic equalizer ...................... 42
Center speaker ...................................... 40
Center width ......................................... 32
CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 19
COAXIAL INPUT assignment ............ 43
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ........ 10, 14
Connecting a cable
TV/satellite tuner ............................. 15
Connecting a CD player ....................... 17
Connecting a DVD player .................... 15
Connecting a DVD recorder ................ 15
Connecting a video monitor ................. 15
Connecting audio components ............. 17
Connecting speakers ............................ 12
Connecting the AM antennas ............... 18
Connecting the FM antennas ............... 18
Connecting the power cable ................. 18
Connecting to
the CENTER terminals .................... 13
Connecting to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks ....................................16
Connecting to
the FRONT A terminals ...................13
Connecting to
the FRONT B terminals ...................13
Connecting to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks ..........17
Connecting to
the SURROUND terminals ..............13
Connecting to the VIDEO AUX ..........16
Connecting video components .............15
Controlling a TV ..................................47
Controlling other components ..............48
Creating original SCENE templates .....26
CROSSOVER ......................................41
Crossover ..............................................41
CT WIDTH ..........................................32
■ D
D)CENTER GEQ .................................42
D)DECODER MODE ..........................44
D)PARAM. INI ....................................45
Decoder mode ......................................44
Decoder select mode ............................44
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL jacks ..............................14
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL jacks ...............................14
DIGITAL INPUT jacks ........................10
DIMENSION .......................................32
Dimension ............................................32
DIMMER .............................................45
Dimmer ................................................45
Disc Listening ......................................25
Display settings ....................................45
DSP LEVEL .........................................32
DSP level ..............................................32
DTS decoder indicator .........................19
DTS decoder prioritize setting .............44
DVD Live Viewing ..............................25
DVD Movie Viewing ...........................25
DVD Viewing ......................................25
DVR Viewing .......................................25
Dynamic range .....................................42
■ E
E)LFE LEVEL .....................................42
E)MULTI CH SET ...............................44
Editing sound fields parameters ...........32
ENHANCER indicator .........................19
Enjoying 2-channel sources using the
standard decoders .............................32
Exchanging preset stations ...................36
■ F
F)D.RANGE .........................................42
Factory presets .....................................50
FM tuning .............................................34
FRONT .................................................40
FRONT B ............................................ 40
FRONT B speaker setting ................... 40
Front panel display .............................. 19
Front speakers ...................................... 40
■ G
G)AUDIO SET .................................... 43
Game .................................................... 31
Game Playing ...................................... 25
■ H
Hall ...................................................... 31
Headphone ........................................... 42
Headphone dynamic range .................. 42
Headphones indicator .......................... 19
HiFi DSP indicator .............................. 19
HP D.R ................................................ 42
HP LFE ................................................ 42
■ I
Infrared window .................................. 20
INI.VOL. ............................................. 43
Initial volume ....................................... 43
Input assignment .................................. 43
Input channel and
speaker indicators ............................ 19
Input channel indicators ...................... 19
Input menu ........................................... 38
Input rename ........................................ 44
Input source indicators ........................ 19
Input source information ..................... 30
Installing batteries
in the remote control ......................... 3
■ J
Jazz ...................................................... 31
■ L
LFE indicator ....................................... 19
LFE/Bass out ....................................... 41
Listening to
unprocessed input signals ................ 33
Low-frequency effect level .................. 42
■ M
Manual preset tuning ........................... 35
MANUAL SETUP .............................. 38
Manual setup ....................................... 38
Manual tuning ...................................... 34
MAX VOL. .......................................... 43
Maximum volume ............................... 43
MEM. GUARD ................................... 45
Memory guard ..................................... 45
Movie Dramatic ................................... 31
Movie Spacious ................................... 31
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 10
Multi channel input setup .................... 44
Multi-channel sources and sound field
programs with headphones .............. 33
Multi-information display ................... 19
Music Disc Listening ........................... 25
Index
Index
60 En
Music Enh. 2ch .................................... 31
Music Enh. 5ch .................................... 31
MUTE indicator ................................... 19
MUTE TYP. ......................................... 43
Muting type .......................................... 43
■ N
NIGHT indicator .................................. 19
Night listening mode ............................ 28
■ O
OPTICAL INPUT assignment ............. 43
Option menu ........................................ 39
■ P
Parameter initialization ........................ 45
PCM indicator ...................................... 19
Placing speakers ................................... 11
Playing video sources
in the background ............................ 30
Pop/Rock .............................................. 31
PRESET ............................................... 50
Preset SCENE templates ...................... 25
■ R
Radio Listening .................................... 25
Rear panel ............................................ 10
Remote control codes ............................iii
Resetting the system ............................ 55
■ S
SCENE 1 ................................................ 8
SCENE 2 ................................................ 8
SCENE 3 ................................................ 8
SCENE 4 ................................................ 9
Selecting audio input jacks .................. 29
Selecting preset stations ....................... 36
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component as the input source ........ 28
Selecting the night listening mode ....... 28
Selecting the SCENE templates ........... 23
Set menu .............................................. 38
Set this unit to the standby mode ......... 18
Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template
on the remote control ....................... 46
Setting remote control codes ................ 49
Setting the speaker impedance ............. 13
SILENT CINEMA ............................... 33
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 19
SLEEP indicator .................................. 19
Sleep timer ........................................... 30
Sound field programs ........................... 31
Sound menu ......................................... 38
SP A B indicators ................................. 19
SP D.R ................................................. 42
SP IMP. ................................................ 50
SP LFE ................................................. 42
Speaker ................................................. 42
Speaker distance .................................. 42
Speaker distances ................................. 42
Speaker dynamic range ........................ 42
Speaker impedance .............................. 50
Speaker level ........................................ 41
Speaker settings ................................... 40
SPEAKERS terminals ..........................10
Specifications .......................................58
Straight mode .......................................33
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack .............10
Subwoofer phase ..................................41
Supplied accessories ..............................3
SUR. LR ...............................................40
Surround left/right speakers .................40
SWFR PHASE .....................................41
■ T
TEST ....................................................42
Test tone ...............................................42
Troubleshooting ...................................51
Tuner indicators ...................................19
Turning off the power ..........................18
Turning on the power ...........................18
TV Sports .............................................31
TV Sports Viewing ..............................25
TV Viewing ..........................................25
■ U
UNIT ....................................................42
Unit .......................................................42
Using the remote control ......................20
Using your headphones ........................28
■ V
Video cable plugs .................................14
VIDEO jacks ..................................10, 14
Video jacks ...........................................14
VIRTUAL indicator .............................19
VOLUME level indicator .....................19
Volume Trim ........................................44
i
■ Front panel
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
17634 5
8
90 DA C E FB
2
ii
APPENDIX
■ Remote control
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
Q
J
N
I
H
A
O
T
U
V
M
B
K
C
E
D
F
G
P
S
R
L
X
W
iii
List of remote control codes
TV
ACER 0093
ACME 0207
ACURA 0208
ADA 0255
ADC 0206
ADMIRAL 0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
ADYSON 0200, 0207
AGASHI 0200
AGAZI 0206
AGB 0204
AIKO 0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
AIWA 0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
AKAI 0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
AKIBA 0209, 0218
AKURA 0206, 0209, 0218
ALARON 0200
ALBA 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
ALBIRAL 0212
ALLSTAR 0213
AMPLIVISION
0207
AMSTRAD 0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
AMTRON 0062
ANAM 0208
ANAM NATIONAL
0062
ANGLO 0208
ANITECH 0206, 0208
ANSONIC 0203, 0208
AOC 0060, 0061
APEX 0118, 0122, 0132
ARC EN CIEL 0216
ARCAM 0200
ARCAM DELTA
0207
ARISTONA 0213, 0217
ASA 0205, 0211
ASBERG 0213
ASTRA 0208
ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
ATORI 0208
AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
AUDIOTON 0207
AUDIOVOX 0062
AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207
AWA 0200
BAIRD 0216
BANG & OLUFSEN
0205
BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
BASTIDE 0207
BAUR 0217
BEKO 0228
BELCOR 0060
BELL & HOWELL
0058, 0064
BENQ 0051, 0081
BEON 0213, 0217
BESTAR 0213
BINATONE 0207
BLACK STAR 0214
BLAUPUNKT 0255
BLUE SKY 0209, 0218
BONDSTEC 0214
BOOTS 0207
BRADFORD 0062
BRANDT 0216, 0226
BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217
BRITANNIA 0200, 0207
BROCKWOOD
0060
BROKSONIC 0138
BRUNS 0205
BSR 0215
BTC 0209, 0218
BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
CANDLE 0060, 0061
CAPSONIC 0206
CASCADE 0208
CATHAY 0213, 0217
CCE 0127
CELEBRITY 0059
CENTURION 0213, 0217
CENTURY 0205
CGE 0214, 0215
CIMLINE 0208, 0218
CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
CITY 0208
CLARIVOX 0212, 0217
CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
CMS 0200
COLORTYME 0060, 0061
CONCERTO 0060, 0061
CONCORDE 0208
CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213
CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208
CONTEC/CONY
0062
CONTINENTAL EDISON
0216
COSMEL 0208
CRAIG 0062
CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215
CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
CS ELECTRONICS
0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC 0214
CURTIS MATHES
0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC 0062
CYBERTRON 0209, 0218
DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
DAINICHI 0200, 0209, 0218
DANSAI 0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
DANTAX 0217
DAYTRON 0060, 0061, 0208
DE GRAAF 0210
DECCA 0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
DESMET 0213, 0217
DIAMOND 0200
DIMENSIA 0057
DIXI 0208, 0213, 0217
DTS 0208
DUAL 0207, 0215, 0216
DUAL-TEC 0207, 0208, 0215
DUMONT 0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
DURABRAND
0126
DUX 0217
DYNATRON 0213, 0217
ELBE 0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
ELBE-SHARP 0204
ELCIT 0204, 0205
ELECTRO TECH
0208
ELECTROBAND
0059
ELECTROHOME
0059, 0060, 0061
ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218
ELMAN 0215
ELTA 0200, 0208
EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
ENVISION 0060, 0061
ERRES 0213, 0217
ESA 0080
ETRON 0208
EURO-FEEL 0206
EUROLINE 0217
EUROMAN 0200
EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213
EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
FENNER 0208
FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226
FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210
FINLANDIA 0210
FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
FLINT 0213, 0218
FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0200
FORTRESS 0205
FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
FUTURETECH
0062
GATEWAY 0094
GBC 0208, 0215, 0218
GE 0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215
GENERAL TECHNIC
0208
GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
GIBRALTER 0060
GOLDHAND 0200
GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
GPM 0209, 0218
GRAETZ 0211
GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217
GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
GRUNPY 0062
HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207
HALLMARK 0060, 0061
HAMPTON 0200, 0207
HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
HANTAREX 0204, 0208
HARVARD 0062
HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
HIFIVOX 0216
HIGASHI 0200
HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
HISAWA 0209, 0218
HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
HORNYPHON 0213
HOSHAI 0209, 0218
HUANYU 0200, 0207
HYGASHI 0200, 0207
HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
ICES 0200, 0218
IMA 0062
IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
INDIANA 0213, 0217
INFINITY 0063
INGELEN 0211
INGERSOL 0208
iv
APPENDIX
INNO HIT 0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
INNOVATION 0206, 0208
INTERBUY 0208, 0214
INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
INTERNATIONAL
0200
INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218
IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
ISUKAI 0209, 0218
ITC 0207, 0215
ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
ITT 0129, 0208, 0211
ITV 0208, 0217
JBL 0063
JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061
JCB 0059
JENSEN 0060, 0061
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
KAMOSONIC 0207
KAMP 0200, 0207
KAPSCH 0211
KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
KENDO 0128, 0210
KENNEDY 0215
KENWOOD 0060, 0061
KINGSLEY 0200, 0207
KLOSS NOVABEAM
0062
KNEISSEL 0203
KOLSTER 0213
KONKA 0209, 0218
KORPEL 0213, 0217
KORTING 0205
KOYODA 0208
KTV 0062, 0127, 0207
KYOTO 0200, 0212
LENCO 0208
LENOIR 0207, 0208
LESA 0214
LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
LIESENK 0217
LIFE 0206, 0208
LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218
LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217
LOGIK 0058
LUMA 0210, 0217
LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217
LUX MAY 0213
LUXMAN 0060, 0061
LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210
LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
MAG 0050
MAGNADYNE
0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207
MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
MAGNUM 0206, 0208
MAJESTIC 0058
MANDOR 0206
MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
MARELLI 0205
MARK 0200, 0213, 0217
MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
MEDIATOR 0213, 0217
MEDION 0206, 0208
MEGATRON 0061
MELECTRONIC
0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
MEMPHIS 0208
METZ 0205
MGA 0060, 0061
MICROMAXX 0206, 0208
MICROSTAR 0206, 0208
MINERVA 0204
MINOKA 0213
MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
MONTGOMERY WARD
0058
MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
MULTI SYSTEM
0217
MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
MURPHY 0200, 0207
NAD 0061
NAONIS 0210
NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
NECKERMANN
0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
NEI 0213, 0217
NESCO 0214
NET-TV 0082, 0101
NEW TECH 0208, 0213
NEW WORLD 0209, 0218
NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207
NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
NIKKO 0061
NOBLIKO 0200, 0207
NOGAMATIC 0216
NOKIA 0129, 0211
NORDMENDE
0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
NORDVISION 0217
OCEANIC 0211
OLEVIA 0052, 0084
ONCEAS 0207
ONWA 0062, 0218
ORBIT 0213
ORION 0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
ORLINE 0218
ORSOWE 0204
OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
OSIO 0201
OSO 0209, 0218
OSUME 0218
OTTO VERSAND
0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
PAEL 0200, 0207
PALLADIUM 0207
PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
PATHE CINEMA
0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
PATHE MARCONI
0212, 0216
PAUSA 0208
PERDIO 0200
PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
PHILHARMONIC
0207
PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063,
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
PHILIPS MAGNAVOX
0124
PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
PILOT 0060
PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
PLANTRON 0206, 0213
POLAROID 0075
POPPY 0208
PORTLAND 0060, 0061
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0204, 0210
PRECISION 0207
PRIMA 0208, 0211
PROFEX 0208
PROFI-TRONIC
0213
PROLINE 0213
PROSCAN 0057
PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217
PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
PROTON 0060, 0061
PROVIEW 0050
PROVISION 0217
PULSAR 0060
PYE 0213, 0217
PYMI 0208
QUASAR 0152, 0214
QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
RADIALVA 0218
RADIO SHACK
0064
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
0057, 0060, 0061,
0062, 0064
RADIOLA 0213, 0217
RADIOMARELLI
0204, 0205, 0214
RADIOTONE 0213
RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
REALISTIC 0064
REVOX 0213, 0217
REX 0206, 0210, 0211
RFT 0203, 0205
RHAPSODY 0200
R-LINE 0213, 0217
ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
ROBOTRON 0205
ROWA 0200
RTF 0205
SABA 0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
SACCS 0212
SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
SAMBERS 0204
SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
SANDRA 0200, 0207
SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213
SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
SBR 0217
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
SCOTCH 0061
SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062
v
SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
SEI 0204
SEI-SINUDYNE
0204, 0205, 0211
SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215
SENCORA 0208
SENTRA 0218
SERINO 0200
SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
SHOGUN 0060
SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215
SICATEL 0212
SIEMENS 0255
SIERRA 0213
SIGNATURE 0058
SILVA 0200
SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215
SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
SKANTIC 0211
SOLAVOX 0211
SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
SONOLOR 0211
SONTEC 0213, 0217
SONY 0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
SOUND & VISION
0209, 0218
SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062
SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217
SSS 0060, 0062
STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
STARLIGHT 0217
STARLITE 0062
STENWAY 0218
STERN 0210, 0211
SUNKAI 0208, 0218
SUNWOOD 0208, 0213
SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207
SUPERTECH 0200
SUPRA 0208
SUPREME 0059
SUSUMU 0209
SUTRON 0208
SYDNEY 0200, 0207
SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080
SYSLINE 0217
SYTONG 0200
TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210
TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
TCM 0206, 0208
TEAC 0127
TEC 0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
TECHWOOD 0060, 0061
TEKNIKA 0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
TELEAVIA 0216
TELECOR 0218
TELEFUNKEN
0065, 0213, 0216
TELEGAZI 0218
TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217
TELETON 0207
TELEVIDEON 0200
TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
TESMET 0213
TEVION 0206, 0208
TEXET 0200, 0207
THOMSON 0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
THORN 0212, 0217
TMK 0060, 0061
TOKAI 0213
TOKYO 0200, 0207
TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
TOWADA 0211, 0215
TRANSTEC 0200
TRIDENT 0204
TRISTAR 0218
TRIUMPH 0204
UHER 0211, 0213
ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
UNITED 0217
UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
UNIVOX 0212
VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
VEXA 0208, 0217
VICTOR 0213
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
VIDEOLOGIQUE
0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
VIDEOSAT 0214
VIDEOSYSTEM
0213
VIDEOTECHNIC
0200
VIDTECH 0060, 0061
VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
VISIOLA 0200, 0207
VISION 0213
VORTEC 0213, 0217
VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
WALTHAM 0207, 0212
WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218
WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
WEGA 0205
WELTBLICK 0213, 0217
WESTON 0215
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0008, 0200, 0207,
0217
WINCOM 0055, 0056
YAMAHA 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0005, 0060,
0061
YAMISHI 0218
YOKO 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
YORX 0209, 0218
ZANUSSI 0210
ZENITH 0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
TV/DVD COMBO
AIWA 0139, 2055
APEX 0132, 2049
BROKSONIC 0138, 2060
BUSH 0230, 2112
JVC 0136, 2053
PANASONIC 0137, 2054, 0254,
2110
RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
SYLVANIA 0134, 2052
THOMSON 0226, 2109
TOSHIBA 0131, 2048, 0231,
2111
TV/DVD/VCR COMBO
PANASONIC 0141, 1040, 2057
SAMSUNG 0241, 1070, 2113
SHARP 0143, 1028, 2059
SYLVANIA 0142, 1041, 2058
TOSHIBA 0140, 1029, 2056
TV/VCR COMBO
AIWA 0237, 1066
BUSH 0237, 1066
DAEWOO 0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
GE 0147, 1030
GOODMANS 0240, 1069
GRUNDIG 0236, 1062
HITACHI 0156, 1039
JVC 0153, 1036
MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033
ORION 0235, 1065
PANASONIC 0151, 1034
PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
QUASAR 0152, 1035
RCA 0149, 1032
ROADSTAR 0237, 1066
SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
SHARP 0145, 1028
SONY 0234, 1064
SYLVANIA 0148, 1031
TATUNG 0237, 1066
TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
ZENITH 0154, 1037
DVD/VCR COMBO
JVC 1017, 1017, 2045,
2045
LG 1071, 2087
PANASONIC 1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
PHILIPS 1025, 2046
RCA 1022, 2042
SAMSUNG 1021, 1021, 2041,
2104
SHARP 1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
SONY 1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
TOSHIBA 1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
ZENITH 1026, 2047
VCR
ADMIRAL 1008, 1013
ADVENTURA
1005
AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
AKAI 1007, 1043
AKIBA 1050
AKURA 1043, 1050
ALBA 1044, 1050
AMERICAN HIGH
1004
AMSTRAD 1042
ANITECH 1050
ASA 1045, 1046
ASHA 1002, 1014
ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
AUDIO DYNAMICS
1000
AUDIOVOX 1003
BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047
BASIC LINE 1044, 1050
BAUR 1046
BEAUMARK 1002, 1014
BELL & HOWELL
1001
BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048
BROKSONIC 1012, 1013
BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066
CALIX 1003
CANDLE 1002, 1003
CANON 1004
CCE 1006
CGE 1042, 1043
CIMLINE 1044, 1050
CITIZEN 1002, 1003
COLORTYME 1000
COLT 1006
CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
CROWN 1050
CURTIS MATHES
1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
CYBERNEX 1002, 1014
DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
DANSAI 1050
DANTAX 1044
DBX 1000
DE GRAAF 1046, 1049
DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046
DENON 1010
DIMENSIA 1009
DUAL 1043, 1046
DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
DYNATECH 1005
ELECTROHOME
1003
ELECTROPHONIC
1003
ELTA 1050
vi
APPENDIX
EMERSON 1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
ETZUKO 1050
FERGUSON 1043
FIDELITY 1042
FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049
FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
FISHER 1001, 1047
FLINT 1044
FORMENTI/PHOENIX
1046
FUJI 1004
FUJITSU 1042
FUNAI 1005, 1042
GALAXY 1042
GARRARD 1005
GBC 1050
GE 1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
GEC 1046
GELOSO 1050
GENERAL TECHNIC
1044, 1048
GO VIDEO 1014
GOLDHAND 1050
GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
GRADIENTE 1005
GRAETZ 1043, 1047
GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049
GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050
GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062
HANSEATIC 1045, 1046
HARLEY DAVIDSON
1005
HARMAN/KARDON
1000
HARWOOD 1006
HCM 1050
HEADQUARTER
1001
HINARI 1044, 1050
HISAWA 1044
HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
1010
HYPSON 1044, 1050
IMPERIAL 1042
INNO HIT 1046, 1050
INNOVATION 1044, 1048
INSTANT REPLAY
1004
INTERBUY 1045
INTERFUNK 1046, 1047
INTERVISION 1042
IRRADIO 1045, 1050
ITT 1043, 1047
ITV 1045
JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
JCL 1004
JENSEN 1007
JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
KAISUI 1050
KARCHER 1046
KENDO 1044
KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
KODAK 1003, 1004
KORPEL 1050
LEYCO 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
LIFETEC 1044, 1048
LLOYD'S 1005
LOEWE 1048
LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046
LOGIK 1006, 1050
LUXOR 1047
LXI 1003
M ELECTRONIC
1042
MAGNASONIC
1047
MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033
MAGNIN 1003, 1014
MANESTH 1050
MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
MARTA 1003
MATSUI 1044, 1045
MATSUSHITA 1004
MEDIATOR 1046
MEDION 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
MEMPHIS 1050
METZ 1048
MGA 1014
MGN TECHNOLOGY
1002, 1014
MICROMAXX 1044, 1048
MICROSTAR 1044, 1048
MIGROS 1042
MINOLTA 1010
MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046
MONTGOMERY WARD
1008
MOTOROLA 1004, 1008
MTC 1002, 1014
MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
MURPHY 1042
NATIONAL 1048
NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
NECKERMANN
1043, 1046
NEI 1046
NESCO 1050
NIKKO 1003
NOBLEX 1002, 1014
NOKIA 1043, 1047
NORDMENDE
1043
OCEANIC 1042, 1043
OKANO 1044
OLYMPUS 1004
OPTIMUS 1003, 1008
ORION 1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
ORSON 1042
OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050
OTTO VERSAND
1046
PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050
PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
PATHE MARCONI
1043
PENNEY 1010, 1014
PENTAX 1010, 1049
PERDIO 1042
PHILCO 1004, 1051
PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
PHILIPS MAGNAVOX
1018
PHONOLA 1046
PILOT 1003
PIONEER 1011, 1046
PRINZ 1042
PROFEX 1050
PROFITRONIC
1014
PROLINE 1042
PROSCAN 1009
PROSONIC 1044
PROTEC 1006
PYE 1046, 1056
QUARTER 1001
QUARTZ 1001, 1047
QUASAR 1004, 1035
QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047
RADIO SHACK
1003
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
RADIOLA 1046
RADIX 1003
RANDEX 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
REX 1043
RFT 1046
ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066
SABA 1043
SAISHO 1044, 1050
SALORA 1047
SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
SANKY 1008
SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
SBR 1046
SCHAUB LORENZ
1042, 1043, 1047
SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
SCOTT 1012
SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
SEG 1050
SEI-SINUDYNE
1046
SELECO 1043
SENTRON 1050
SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050
SHIVAKI 1045
SHOGUN 1002, 1014
SIEMENS 1045, 1047
SIGNATURE 2000
1008
SILVA 1045
SINGER 1004, 1006
SINUDYNE 1046
SONTEC 1045
SONY 1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
STS 1004, 1010
SUNKAI 1044
SUNSTAR 1042
SUNTRONIC 1042
SUNWOOD 1050
SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
SYMPHONIC 1005
TAISHO 1044
TANDY 1001
TASHIKO 1003, 1042
TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
TCM 1044, 1048
TEAC 1005, 1007
TECHNICS 1004, 1048
TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005
TELEAVIA 1043
TELEFUNKEN
1043
TENOSAL 1050
TENSAI 1042, 1045, 1050
TEVION 1044, 1048
THOMSON 1043, 1058
THORN 1043, 1047
TMK 1002, 1014
TOKAI 1045, 1050
TONSAI 1050
TOSHIBA 1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014
TOWADA 1050
TOWIKA 1050
UHER 1045
UNITECH 1002, 1014
UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046
VECTOR RESEARCH
1000
VIDEO CONCEPTS
1000
VIDEON 1044, 1048
VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014
WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
WELTBLICK 1045
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
1013
XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006
YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007
YAMISHI 1050
YOKAN 1050
YOKO 1045, 1050
ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037
DVD
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
2078
AIWA 2055, 2100
AKAI 2096
AKURA 2076
ALBA 2078, 2086
APEX 2027, 2049
AWA 2078
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in China
WK65660
AXION 2078
BRAINWAVE 2096
BRANDT 2073, 2085
BROKSONIC 2060
BUSH 2075, 2078, 2112
CENTREX 2077
CLASSIC 2078
CLATRONIC 2075
COBY 2078
C-TECH 2074
CYBERHOME
2025, 2079, 2091
DAEWOO 2092, 2098
DANSAI 2096
DAYTEK 2080, 2089
DEC 2075
DENON 2030, 2102, 2103
DENVER 2075, 2076
DIAMOND 2074
DK DIGITAL 2094
DUAL 2078
D-VISION 2096
DVX 2074
ELTA 2096
EUROLINE 2096
FUNAI 2052, 2058
GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
2074
GLOBAL SPHERE
2074
GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078
GRUNDIG 2077, 2098
H&B 2075
HAAZ 2074
HE 2078
HITACHI 2032, 2072
HOME ELECTRONICS
2078
INNOVATION 2072
IRRADIO 2134
JDB 2078
JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
KENWOOD 2030, 2097
KINGAVON 2075
KODA 2075
LAWSON 2074
LENCO 2075
LG 2084, 2087
LIFETEC 2072
LIMIT 2074
LOGICLAB 2074
LUXOR 2077
MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075
MAGNUM 2072
MBO 2078
MEDION 2072
MICROMAXX
2072
MICROMEDIA
2073
MICROSTAR 2072
MITSUBISHI 2035
MIZUDA 2075
MUSTEK 2078
NAIKO 2077
ONKYO 2073, 2135
ORAVA 2075
P&B 2075
PACIFIC 2074
PANASONIC 2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
PIONEER 2036, 2082
PROLINE 2077
PROVISION 2075
RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
RED STAR 2076
REOC 2074
ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086
ROWA 2077
SABA 2085
SABAKI 2074
SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
SANSUI 2074
SANYO 2095
SCANMAGIC 2078
SCIENTIFIC LABS
2074
SCOTT 2088
SEG 2074, 2086
SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
SILVA 2076
SINGER 2074
SKYMASTER 2074, 2078
SKYWORTH 2076
SM ELECTRONIC
2074, 2078
SONY 2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
SOUNDMASTER
2074
SOUNDMAX 2074
STANDARD 2074
STAR CLUSTER
2074
STARMEDIA 2075
SUPERVISION
2074, 2078
SYLVANIA 2052, 2058
SYNN 2074
TCM 2072
TEAC 2074
TEC 2076
TECHNICS 2030
TECHNIKA 2096
TECHNOSONIC
2096
TEVION 2072, 2074
THOMSON 2085, 2109
TOKAI 2076
TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
UNITED 2078
VOXSON 2078
WHARFEDALE
2074
XLOGIC 2074
YAKUMO 2077
YAMADA 2077
YAMAHA 2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
YUKAI 2078
ZENITH 2038, 2047, 2073
DVD-DVR
PANASONIC 2067
PIONEER 2114
SAMSUNG 2115
TOSHIBA 2068
DVD/LD COMBO
PIONEER 2036
DVD RECORDER
APEX 2024
JVC 2070
LG 2071
PANASONIC 2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
PHILIPS 2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
PIONEER 2021
RCA 2018
SONY 2022, 2064
TOSHIBA 2068
YAMAHA 2023
YUKAI 2069
DVR
ABS 2132
ALIENWARE 2132
CYBERPOWER
2132
DELL 2132
DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
DISH NETWORK
2126, 2127
DISHPRO 2126
ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127
EXPRESSVU 2126
GATEWAY 2132
GOI 2126
HEWLETT PACKARD
2132
HITACHI 2008
HOWARD COMPUTERS
2132
HTS 2126
HUGHES 2123, 2128
HUMAX 2123
HUSH 2132
IBUYPOWER 2132
JVC 2126, 2127
LINKSYS 2132
MEDIA CENTER PC
2132
MICROSOFT 2132
MIND 2132
NIVEUS MEDIA
2132
NORTHGATE 2132
PANASONIC 2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014
PROSCAN 2129
RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120
SHARP 2009, 2010
SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120
SONY 2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
STACK 9 2132
SYSTEMAX 2132
TAGAR SYSTEMS
2132
TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132
TOUCH 2132
ULTIMATETV 2133
VIEWSONIC 2132
VOODOO 2132
YAMAHA 2011
ZT GROUP 2132
LD PLAYER
YAMAHA 2002
CD PLAYER
YAMAHA 5000, 5013
CD RECORDER
YAMAHA 5001
MD
YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004
TAPE DECK
YAMAHA 5005, 5006
TUNER
YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA 5011
(iPod)
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
■ Front panel/Face avant
HTR-6025
UC
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
1 7634 5
8
2
90 DAC EFB
00_Sheet_HTR-6025_UC.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 2, 2007 2:31 PM
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
Q
J
N
I
H
A
O
T
U
V
M
B
K
C
E
D
F
G
P
S
R
L
X
W
WK65680
Printed in China
00_Sheet_HTR-6025_UC.book Page i Wednesday, May 2, 2007 2:31 PM
Documenttranscriptie
U HTR-6025 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Important safety instructions 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, Important safety instructions d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. Caution-iii En 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 PREPARATION Connections ........................................................... 10 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 23 Playback ................................................................ 27 Basic operations....................................................... 27 Additional operations............................................... 28 Sound field programs ........................................... 31 Sound field program descriptions............................ 31 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 34 Recording .............................................................. 37 Advanced setup......................................................50 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting.....................................................51 Glossary..................................................................56 Specifications .........................................................58 Index .......................................................................59 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1 STANDBY/ON” or “A MULTI CH IN” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the appendix pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 34 Manual tuning.......................................................... 34 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 35 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 35 Selecting preset stations........................................... 36 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 36 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 46 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 47 Setting remote control codes ................................... 49 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 23 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 26 Remote control features........................................46 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic setup ............................................................. 21 Using set menu ........................................................ 39 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 40 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 43 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 45 BASIC OPERATION Rear panel ................................................................ 10 Placing speakers....................................................... 11 Connecting speakers ................................................ 12 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14 Connecting video components................................. 15 Connecting audio components................................. 17 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18 Connecting the power cable..................................... 18 Turning on and off the power .................................. 18 Front panel display .................................................. 19 Set menu.................................................................38 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................ 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button .................................... 8 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION English 1 En Features Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multichannel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ DTS decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. 2 En Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER TV POWER STANDBY POWER MUTE Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) 1 AM loop antenna 3 AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL 1 2 V-AUX INTRODUCTION ■ Checking the supplied accessories SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 VOLUME 2 Indoor FM antenna ENTER DISPLAY RETURN REC l 1 PROG h 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Note 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. English 3 En Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. Subwoofer Front left speaker Preparation: Check the items Surround right speaker ❏ Indoor FM antenna ❏ AM loop antenna The following items are not included in the package of this unit. Center speaker ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2 DVD player ❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1 Surround left speaker ❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. ❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1 Step 1: Set up your speakers Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5 ☞ P. 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ................................................. 1 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable ................................................ 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 8 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers Loosen SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND R L CENTER Insert INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Tighten FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT COAXIAL SURROUND AUDIO CENTER L L R R OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. Front left speaker To the front right speaker Center and surround speakers Release Insert Press down Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker 4 To the center speaker To the surround left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack of this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver OUTPUT IN (PLAY) MD/ OUT CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Subwoofer cable 5 En English Input jack Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components 2 Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. AV receiver SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND R CENTER L FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT DVR AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT FM 75 DVD player OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO CENTER L DVD L IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER 1 R COAXIAL OUTPUT CD R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player Video cable Connect the video cable to the video input jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Video monitor AV receiver AV receiver L/MONO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO-1 IN AUDIO R Y PB PR L/MONO COLOR STREAM HD IN R AUDIO Video input jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio output jack Digital coaxial audio cable 6 En DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Quick start guide 4 ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 11 • Connecting a video monitor and DVD player ☞ P. 15 • Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and DVD recorder INTRODUCTION Connect the FM and AM antennas to this unit. See page 18 for the details. ☞ P. 15 • Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ☞ P. 16 Indoor FM antenna AM loop antenna • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a CD player and an MD recorder ☞ P. 17 • Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel audio connection ☞ P. 17 Open the lever Insert Close the lever • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 18 y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. 5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. English 7 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 13). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel. 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 5 Rotate 8 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources. 3 Press F SCENE 1. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the back ground music for this room...” Press F SCENE 2 (or E SCENE 2) to select “Disc Listening”. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” Press F SCENE 3 (or E SCENE 3) to select “TV Viewing”. Note To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a cable TV or satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 15 for details. y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 8 En Quick start guide Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station...” Notes • To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See pages 34 to 36 for tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. y ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 23 ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 27 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 23 for details. ■ After using this unit... INTRODUCTION Press F SCENE 4 (or E SCENE 4) to select “Radio Listening”. What do you want to do with this unit? ☞ P. 34 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. ☞ P. 31 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (BASIC SETUP) ☞ P. 21 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit ☞ P. 38 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 46 • Adjusts the advanced parameters ☞ P. 50 This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press 1 STANDBY/ON (or L POWER) on the front panel. See page 18 for details. Note ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 30 In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. English 9 En Connections Connections Rear panel 1 2 3 4 ANTENNA SPEAKERS SURROUND R L CENTER FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER L 1 R COAXIAL DVD CENTER L R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER 5 6 7 L 8 1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See page 16 for connection information. 5 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 2 VIDEO jacks See page 15 for connection information. 6 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 3 ANTENNA terminals See page 18 for connection information. 7 AUDIO jacks See pages 15 and 17 for connection information. 4 SPEAKERS terminals See page 12 for connection information. 8 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 12 for connection information. 10 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. FL C FR FR SW 30˚ FL SR PREPARATION C SL SR SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SR 1.8 m (6 ft) Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. English 11 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • • • • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13). Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off. Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. Front speakers (B) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left Center speaker ANTENNA SPEAKERS SURROUND R L CENTER FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD COAXIAL DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD L IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER 1 R R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER Subwoofer ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 12 En L Right Left Front speakers (A) Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) Connections ■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals 2 1 Setting the speaker impedance Caution Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 3 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 18 for details about turning on or off this unit. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. Banana plug PREPARATION 1 1 SP IMP.- 8 MIN 4 ■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER, and SURROUND terminals Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. SP IMP.- 6 MIN Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. Note 1 Press down the tab. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 13 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs Coaxial digital audio cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR VIDEO (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red) O V Y PB PR Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Notes COMPONENT VIDEO • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. 14 En Input VIDEO Output (MONITOR OUT) PR PR PB PB Y Y Connections Connecting video components Connect the video components as follows. y Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV, and cable TV to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO connection (see page 16). ■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and a DVD recorder ANTENN AN COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR DVD MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT PR PR VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB MONITOR OUT DVR OUT PREPARATION ■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD player DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND DTV/ CBL 2 DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MULTI CH INPUT CD FRONT DVD R R IN (PLA CD 1 R COAXIAL R SUBWOOFER L R V L V Video out C Audio out Video in Audio out O Audio out V Video out AUDIO CENTER L SUBWOOFER Audio out SURROUND L L 1 COAXIAL Y AUDIO DVD CENTER L DVD 3 R V L R L R V Video in 2 CD Audio in DTV/ CBL Y Audio out 3 Video out CD DVD player Video monitor Cable TV or Satellite tuner DVD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections indicates alternative connections English 15 En Connections ■ Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using COMPONENT VIDEO connection. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Note Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO connection. Video monitor Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. Video in Video out DVD player VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 Y l A/B/C/D/E FM/AM PB PR Y PB PR l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h TONE CONTROL 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L V L AUDIO R PORTABLE COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT PR PB R Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER Video output L Audio output R SUBWOOFER 16 En PR Y PB PR Video out PB Video out Y Cable TV or satellite tuner DVD recorder Game console or video camera 3.5 mm stereo mini plug Connections Connecting audio components Connect the audio components as follows. ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. PREPARATION VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD L 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER O L R Audio out L Audio out Audio out CD player R L R Audio in CD recorder or MD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. MULTI CH INPUT DTV/ CBL FRONT SURROUND Notes CENTER 2 L • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 28), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. 1 R R L R Center out Front out L Subwoofer out SUBWOOFER Surround out DVD COAXIAL English Multi-format player or external decoder 17 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Power cable Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) To the AC wall outlet ANTENNA Turning on and off the power AM ■ Turning on this unit GND FM 75 UNBAL. IN MD/ (PLAY) CD-R Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or L POWER) to turn on this unit. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Set this unit to the standby mode Ground For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 18 En Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or M STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Connections Front panel display 1 2 3 5 4 DVR t VIRTUAL ENHANCER V-AUX SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB DTV/CBL 6 MD/CD-R DVD TUNER 7 CD AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE HiFi DSP q DIGITAL q PL ft q PL 0 A B 1 Decoder indicator Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 31). 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 33). 4 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 33). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 6 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see page 34). C D E VOLUME dB LFE L C R SL SR F B NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 28). C CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 31). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 31). D Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. E SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 30). F Input channel and speaker indicators LFE LFE indicator 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 28). L C R SL SR 8 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. 9 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 0 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 28). PREPARATION mS dB PCM 9 8 Input channel indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. A SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected (see page 27). English 19 En Connections ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30º 30º Approximately 6 m (20 ft) X Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 49. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 20 En Basic setup Basic setup The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes 1 Press D AMP on the remote control. 2 Press P MENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 5 SUBWOOFER .. YES . BASIC SETUP 3 Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press G ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. “ROOM” appears in the front panel display. 6 ROOM: 4 S >M L Press Gl / h to select the desired setting. Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Press Gn to select “SUBWOOFER” and then Gl / h to select the desired setting. PREPARATION • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 40). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 40). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press HRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. Press Gn to select “SPEAKERS” and then Gl / h to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. SPEAKERS..5spk Choice Display Speakers Choices: S, M, L S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) 2spk L R 3spk L C R 4spk L SL R SR 5spk L C R SL SR Front L/R Front L/R, Center Front L/R, Surround L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R English 21 En Basic setup 7 Press G n to select “SET” and then G l / h to select the desired setting. SET 10 Press G ENTER to confirm your selection. • If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top set menu display. • If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. 11 Press Gk / n to select a speaker and then Gl / h to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. >CANCEL Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press P MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 8 Press G ENTER to confirm your selection. If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display. FR ----||---• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. CHECK:TestTone y • Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes in the front panel display. 9 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting. Note CHECK OK? .. YES Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu to balance the output level of each speaker. 22 En The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 12 Press P MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 12 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press D INPUT l / h (or press DAMP and then G l / h) to select the desired template. l SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening INPUT h Front panel or If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template BASIC OPERATION Remote control 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Press and hold the desired F SCENE (or E SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds 1 or 1 Front panel Remote control DVD MovieView 3 Press the F SCENE (or E SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 Front panel or 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 46 for details. 1 Flashes English DVD Viewing 23 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates DVD Viewing Default SCENE buttons 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SA-CD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Music Disc Listening Disc Listening CD 2 CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) DTV/CBL Radio Listening 4 TV Viewing 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Game Playing y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 26 for details. 24 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE template descriptions SCENE template CD Music Listening Features Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as the back ground music on your CD player. Input source Playback mode CD DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on your DVD player. DVD STRAIGHT 5ch Stereo Radio Listening (SCENE 4 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. TUNER DVD Movie Viewing Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Movie Dramatic MUSIC ENHANCER 5ch STEREO TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs. DTV/CBL STRAIGHT DVD Live Viewing DVD Pop/Rock TV Sports Viewing Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on TV. DTV/CBL TV Sports DVR Viewing Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. DVR Movie Dramatic BASIC OPERATION Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on your DVD player. Game Playing Select this SCENE template when you play video games. V-AUX Game Music Disc Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. DVD 2ch Stereo Disc Listening (SCENE 2 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as the back ground music on your DVD player. DVD 5ch Stereo CD Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD 2ch Stereo English 25 En Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 2 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 12 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • The input source component • The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT mode • The night listening mode setting (see page 28) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template SCENE template library (Image) Press G k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then G l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 3 Press the E SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 Press and hold the desired E SCENE button for 3 seconds and then press D AMP. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the front panel display. 1 AMP 3 seconds Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the E SCENE button, press G l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see page 23). 26 En y An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the E SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 46 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each E SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The customized SCENE template is only available for the assigned E SCENE button. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations 1 3 Rotate 8 VOLUME (or press Q VOLUME +/ –) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 6 Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then press I PROG l / h) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 31 for details about sound field programs. Movie Dramatic Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press 9 SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up in the front panel display. Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input source DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD INPUT:DVD Currently selected surround field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 33). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the front panel display, see page 30 for details. BASIC OPERATION 2 5 ■ Guide to contents Currently selected input source When you want to... 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 34 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. See page Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 29 Edit parameters of sound field programs 32 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 28 Use headphones 28 Select a decoder to play back sources with 32 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 30 English 27 En Playback ■ Selecting the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source Additional operations ■ Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. VOLUME FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY y TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press A MULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 44). STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input source. 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT Notes • Sound field programs mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. ■ Selecting the night listening mode y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 33). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. ■ Muting the audio output Press NMUTE to mute the audio output. Press NMUTE again to resume the audio output. y • You can also rotate 8 VOLUME (or press QVOLUME +/–) to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 43). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 28 En The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press DAMP and then press KNIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, NIGHT OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-oflistening for all sounds. • Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. Playback 2 ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Press Gl / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. Press 0 TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press A PROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 45). ■ Adjusting speaker levels during playback You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. Note This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP LEVEL” (see page 41). 1 Press E AUDIO SELECT (or B AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD Audio input jack select setting ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker y Once you press FLEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing G k / n. 2 Note This feature is not available when no digital input jack are assigned to the currently selected input source. Press DAMP and then press FLEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display A.SEL:AUTO AUTO BASIC OPERATION ■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. Press G l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB. y 29 En English You can press 4 A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output level. Playback ■ Displaying the signal information ■ Using the sleep timer You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. 1 Press DAMP and then press OSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press O SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. Press DAMP and then press PMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. ;BASIC SETUP 2 Press Gk / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press GENTER. 3 Press Gk / n to switch the displayed information. The following information about the input source appears in the front panel display. Display 4 Description FORMAT Signal format. SAMPL. The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CH The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). B.RATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press P MENU to exit. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. y • To cancel the sleep timer, press O SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing 1 STANDBY/ON (or M STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. MULTI CH IN CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Audio sources Video sources V-AUX 30 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then press IPROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. Notes • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 33). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. • You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing T ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. Category MUSIC Program Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on threedimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Music Enh. 2ch Music Enh. 5ch Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER Features BASIC OPERATION Sound field program descriptions Note 31 En English The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. Sound field programs ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) y Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: Press D AMP and then press J SUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources ■ Editing sound fields parameters You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 1 While listening to a source, press D AMP and then press Gk / n to select the desired parameter. 2 Press Gl / h to change the parameter value. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEM. GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 45). 32 En Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX For PRO LOGIC II Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch Effect level Function: Choices: Adjusts the effect level. LOW, HIGH Sound field programs ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 40), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see page 31). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. LR” is set to “NONE” (see page 40) in the following cases: – when “5ch Stereo” (see page 31) is selected. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 31). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) BASIC OPERATION When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Press B STRAIGHT (or press D AMP and then S STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press B STRAIGHT (or S STRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. English 33 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO A AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) A If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up AUTO TUNED A 34 En AM 1530 kHz AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. You can hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning Manual preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 34 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/ TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes TUNED C3 : AM Flash AUTO A1:FM 87.5 MHz When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 630 kHz Preset station number MEMORY Flashes MEMORY BASIC OPERATION 1 4 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. y You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. TUNED C3 : AM 630 kHz The displayed station has been stored as C3. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. English 35 En FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press C TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or G A/B/C/D/E l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold 2 PRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 2 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY E1 : FM 87.5 MHz Flashes 3 E1 : FM 87.5 MHz y Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Flashes MEMORY A5 : FM 90.7 MHz Flashes 4 36 En Press 2 PRESET/TUNING again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 29) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 29) and the sound field programs (see page 31) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the source component you want to record from. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. BASIC OPERATION Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. English 37 En Set menu Set menu You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 21). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 40 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 41 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 42 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 42 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 42 F)D.RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 42 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 43 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)INPUT ASSIGN Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 43 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 44 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 44 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 44 E)MULTI CH SET Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 44 38 En Set menu Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 45 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings. 45 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 45 D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. 45 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 30). Using set menu 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. 1 1 SOUND MENU Press G k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU 5 Press G k / n repeatedly and then press G ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. • Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items you want to adjust. • To return to the previous menu level, press H RETURN. 6 Press G k / n to select the desired parameter and then G l / h to change the parameter value. • Press G h to increase the value. • Press G l to decrease the value. 7 Press P MENU to exit from set menu. . MANUAL SETUP 3 Press G ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. “1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION Press D AMP and then press P MENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. . BASIC SETUP 2 Press G k / n repeatedly and then press G ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following menus appear in the front panel display as you press G k / n repeatedly. 1 SOUND MENU English 39 En Set menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33). Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Front speakers FRONT Choices: SMALL, LARGE When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). Note When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 41), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33). 40 En Set menu LFE/Bass out BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 40). ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 40). Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 39 and 40). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 39 and 40). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NRM, REV • Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. English 41 En Set menu ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB y Press G k / n to select a frequency band and G l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the frequency band. 100Hz--||-- Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB Speaker LFE SP LFE Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone LFE HP LFE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 41), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range F)D.RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Speaker dynamic range SP D.R Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone dynamic range HP D.R Adjusts the headphone compression. 42 En 0 Set menu ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. Mute type MUTE TYP. Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 28). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB. Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. ■ Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using D INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control). For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1 IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3 IN (2) IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR Note You cannot select a specific item more than once. ADVANCED OPERATION Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 2 INPUT MENU Initial volume INI.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting. English 43 En Set menu ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the front panel display. The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed “My DVD”. DVR DVD 1 V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD My DVD Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or A MULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. MULTI CH IN CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX 2 Press D AMP and then press G l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press G k / n to select the character you want to use and then press G l / h to move to the next space. Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press G n to change the character in the following order, or press Gk to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press P MENU to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 44 En ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD y Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. Set menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press G l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press G h to make the front panel display brighter. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Memory guard MEM.GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM. GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all set menu items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Note ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 29). ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu level. • Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Notes When “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other set menu items. ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”. English 45 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 49). Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 49). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired E SCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. y POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL 1 2 V-AUX * SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 SCENE buttons VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY REC l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Note * Press and hold the E SCENE button and the desired input selector button (C) for 3 seconds. These buttons control the input source component. See page 48 for details of the function of each button. 46 En Press the E SCENE button again to operate the input source component. Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press D AMP to control this unit. Press C DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL (see page 49). POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL 1 2 POWER V-AUX *1 DTV/CBL AMP POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL 1 2 *1 V-AUX SCENE 3 4 SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE MENU VOLUME BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 VOLUME MENU ENTER ENTER RETURN *2 DISPLAY REC RETURN l PROG h 1 2 *2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 DISPLAY REC SUR.DECODE NIGHT l 1 ENT PROG h 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 *2 These buttons always control this unit. These buttons control this unit only when D AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press C DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. These buttons control your TV only when C DTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 48. English 47 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 49). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR AMP y TV MUTE 1 2 3 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 5 MENU VOLUME RETURN 8 DISPLAY REC TV VOL 4 6 l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT LD player CD player MD/CD recorder AV POWER Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TITLE Title PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up (A-E) Power *1 Tuner Band ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Play Disc skip Rec Play Play Skip backward a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop 6 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 7 8 9 MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) Menu Notes *2 9 Digital TV/ Cable TV b *1 7 ENTER DVD player/ VCR recorder Remote control 4 5 TV INPUT SCENE The remote control has 9 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 9 different components. 1 2 3 TV CH V-AUX 2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 49). 48 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000 DTV/CBL – – – V-AUX TUNER YAMAHA 5011 DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011 TUNER YAMAHA 5009 TUNER YAMAHA 5012 POWER AV Default code V-AUX While holding down 2 Press for 3 seconds Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (V) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. ADVANCED OPERATION Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. English 49 En Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only 1 STANDBY/ON, A PROGRAM l / h and B STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. 1 2 3 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press A PROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. 4 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 50 En ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level Front (A or B) 8Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 6Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-17 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with D INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with 9 SPEAKERS. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press N MUTE or Q VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 28 Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. 13 29 27, 28 12 27 — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. — English 51 En Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause See page Check that the impedance setting is correct. 13 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press N MUTE or Q VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 28 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-17 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 5ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. “SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”. This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press B STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain lowfrequency bass signals. 52 En 29 40 31 40 33 41 41 Troubleshooting Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. See page — 29 — 43 — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEM. GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 15, 17 Set “MEM. GUARD” to “OFF”. 45 — Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 12 — English 53 En Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 54 En Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 18 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. — — 34 35 — Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Remedy See page The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 20 Cause Wrong distance or angle. Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 49 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 49 — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h to select “PRESET”. 4 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press 1 STANDBY/ON. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Notes English 55 En Glossary Glossary ■ Audio information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. 56 En DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. Glossary ■ Sound field program information ■ Video information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 57 En Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 100 W • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Power (JEITA) 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 135 W • Dynamic Power (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω) (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ......................................... 110/130/160/180 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front L/R ......................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB V-AUX to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT, 1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ...................................................... 0.06% or less • Video Maximum Input Level.................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range ..................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted (250 mV)......... 100 dB or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less AM SECTION • Channel Separation CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tuning Range.......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply......................................................... 120 V AC, 60 Hz • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Power Consumption................................................... 240 W/320 VA • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω).................................... 0.4 V/470 Ω • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”) • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Weight .............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz) • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT (2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) .................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. 58 En • Standby Power Consumption .................................................. 0.8 W * Specifications are subject to change without notice. INDEX Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU ................................ 38 2 INPUT MENU ............................ 38, 43 2ch Stereo ............................................ 31 3 OPTION MENU ......................... 39, 45 5ch Stereo ............................................ 31 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET ................................ 45 A)INPUT ASSIGN .............................. 43 A)SPEAKER SET ............................... 40 A.DELAY ............................................ 43 Adjusting speaker levels during playback ............................... 29 Adjusting the tonal quality ................... 29 AM tuning ............................................ 34 ANTENNA terminals .......................... 10 Audio cable plugs ................................ 14 Audio delay .......................................... 43 AUDIO jacks ................................. 10, 14 Audio jacks .......................................... 14 AUDIO SELECT ........................... 29, 45 Audio select ......................................... 45 Audio settings ...................................... 43 Automatic preset tuning ....................... 35 Automatic tuning ................................. 34 ■ B B)INPUT RENAME ............................ 44 B)MEMORY GUARD ........................ 45 B)SP LEVEL ....................................... 41 BASIC SETUP .............................. 21, 38 Basic setup ........................................... 38 BASS OUT .......................................... 41 C ■ ■ D D)CENTER GEQ .................................42 D)DECODER MODE ..........................44 D)PARAM. INI ....................................45 Decoder mode ......................................44 Decoder select mode ............................44 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ..............................14 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks ...............................14 DIGITAL INPUT jacks ........................10 DIMENSION .......................................32 Dimension ............................................32 DIMMER .............................................45 Dimmer ................................................45 Disc Listening ......................................25 Display settings ....................................45 DSP LEVEL .........................................32 DSP level ..............................................32 DTS decoder indicator .........................19 DTS decoder prioritize setting .............44 DVD Live Viewing ..............................25 DVD Movie Viewing ...........................25 DVD Viewing ......................................25 DVR Viewing .......................................25 Dynamic range .....................................42 ■ E E)LFE LEVEL .....................................42 E)MULTI CH SET ...............................44 Editing sound fields parameters ...........32 ENHANCER indicator .........................19 Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders .............................32 Exchanging preset stations ...................36 ■ F F)D.RANGE .........................................42 Factory presets .....................................50 FM tuning .............................................34 FRONT .................................................40 ■ G G)AUDIO SET .................................... 43 Game .................................................... 31 Game Playing ...................................... 25 ■ H Hall ...................................................... 31 Headphone ........................................... 42 Headphone dynamic range .................. 42 Headphones indicator .......................... 19 HiFi DSP indicator .............................. 19 HP D.R ................................................ 42 HP LFE ................................................ 42 I Infrared window .................................. 20 INI.VOL. ............................................. 43 Initial volume ....................................... 43 Input assignment .................................. 43 Input channel and speaker indicators ............................ 19 Input channel indicators ...................... 19 Input menu ........................................... 38 Input rename ........................................ 44 Input source indicators ........................ 19 Input source information ..................... 30 Installing batteries in the remote control ......................... 3 ■ J Jazz ...................................................... 31 ■ L LFE indicator ....................................... 19 LFE/Bass out ....................................... 41 Listening to unprocessed input signals ................ 33 Low-frequency effect level .................. 42 ■ M Manual preset tuning ........................... 35 MANUAL SETUP .............................. 38 Manual setup ....................................... 38 Manual tuning ...................................... 34 MAX VOL. .......................................... 43 Maximum volume ............................... 43 MEM. GUARD ................................... 45 Memory guard ..................................... 45 Movie Dramatic ................................... 31 Movie Spacious ................................... 31 MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 10 Multi channel input setup .................... 44 Multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones .............. 33 Multi-information display ................... 19 Music Disc Listening ........................... 25 59 En English C)SP DISTANCE ................................ 42 C)VOLUME TRIM ............................. 44 CD Listening ........................................ 25 CD Music Listening ............................. 25 CENTER .............................................. 40 Center graphic equalizer ...................... 42 Center speaker ...................................... 40 Center width ......................................... 32 CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 19 COAXIAL INPUT assignment ............ 43 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ........ 10, 14 Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner ............................. 15 Connecting a CD player ....................... 17 Connecting a DVD player .................... 15 Connecting a DVD recorder ................ 15 Connecting a video monitor ................. 15 Connecting audio components ............. 17 Connecting speakers ............................ 12 Connecting the AM antennas ............... 18 Connecting the FM antennas ............... 18 Connecting the power cable ................. 18 Connecting to the CENTER terminals .................... 13 FRONT B ............................................ 40 FRONT B speaker setting ................... 40 Front panel display .............................. 19 Front speakers ...................................... 40 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ....................................16 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals ...................13 Connecting to the FRONT B terminals ...................13 Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks ..........17 Connecting to the SURROUND terminals ..............13 Connecting to the VIDEO AUX ..........16 Connecting video components .............15 Controlling a TV ..................................47 Controlling other components ..............48 Creating original SCENE templates .....26 CROSSOVER ......................................41 Crossover ..............................................41 CT WIDTH ..........................................32 Index NIGHT indicator .................................. 19 Night listening mode ............................ 28 SPEAKERS terminals ..........................10 Specifications .......................................58 Straight mode .......................................33 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack .............10 Subwoofer phase ..................................41 Supplied accessories ..............................3 SUR. LR ...............................................40 Surround left/right speakers .................40 SWFR PHASE .....................................41 ■ ■ Music Enh. 2ch .................................... 31 Music Enh. 5ch .................................... 31 MUTE indicator ................................... 19 MUTE TYP. ......................................... 43 Muting type .......................................... 43 ■ N O OPTICAL INPUT assignment ............. 43 Option menu ........................................ 39 ■ P Parameter initialization ........................ 45 PCM indicator ...................................... 19 Placing speakers ................................... 11 Playing video sources in the background ............................ 30 Pop/Rock .............................................. 31 PRESET ............................................... 50 Preset SCENE templates ...................... 25 ■ R Radio Listening .................................... 25 Rear panel ............................................ 10 Remote control codes ............................iii Resetting the system ............................ 55 ■ S SCENE 1 ................................................ 8 SCENE 2 ................................................ 8 SCENE 3 ................................................ 8 SCENE 4 ................................................ 9 Selecting audio input jacks .................. 29 Selecting preset stations ....................... 36 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component as the input source ........ 28 Selecting the night listening mode ....... 28 Selecting the SCENE templates ........... 23 Set menu .............................................. 38 Set this unit to the standby mode ......... 18 Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control ....................... 46 Setting remote control codes ................ 49 Setting the speaker impedance ............. 13 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 33 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 19 SLEEP indicator .................................. 19 Sleep timer ........................................... 30 Sound field programs ........................... 31 Sound menu ......................................... 38 SP A B indicators ................................. 19 SP D.R ................................................. 42 SP IMP. ................................................ 50 SP LFE ................................................. 42 Speaker ................................................. 42 Speaker distance .................................. 42 Speaker distances ................................. 42 Speaker dynamic range ........................ 42 Speaker impedance .............................. 50 Speaker level ........................................ 41 Speaker settings ................................... 40 60 En T TEST ....................................................42 Test tone ...............................................42 Troubleshooting ...................................51 Tuner indicators ...................................19 Turning off the power ..........................18 Turning on the power ...........................18 TV Sports .............................................31 TV Sports Viewing ..............................25 TV Viewing ..........................................25 ■ U UNIT ....................................................42 Unit .......................................................42 Using the remote control ......................20 Using your headphones ........................28 ■ V Video cable plugs .................................14 VIDEO jacks ..................................10, 14 Video jacks ...........................................14 VIRTUAL indicator .............................19 VOLUME level indicator .....................19 Volume Trim ........................................44 ■ Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 4 l STRAIGHT INPUT NIGHT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 9 i 2 h 0 A B C D E F VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE ■ Remote control X A B POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL L M N O C V-AUX AMP D SCENE E F 1 3 4 P BAND LEVEL TITLE G H 2 MENU VOLUME Q ENTER RETURN R DISPLAY REC I PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 S 8 T ENT U SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 APPENDIX J K l V W ii List of remote control codes TV ACER ACME ACURA ADA ADC ADMIRAL ADYSON AGASHI AGAZI AGB AIKO AIWA AKAI AKIBA AKURA ALARON ALBA ALBIRAL ALLSTAR AMPLIVISION 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 0209, 0218 0206, 0209, 0218 0200 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 0212 0213 0207 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 AMTRON 0062 ANAM 0208 ANAM NATIONAL 0062 ANGLO 0208 ANITECH 0206, 0208 ANSONIC 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 APEX 0118, 0122, 0132 ARC EN CIEL 0216 ARCAM 0200 ARCAM DELTA 0207 ARISTONA 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 ASBERG 0213 ASTRA 0208 ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ATORI 0208 AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AUDIOTON 0207 AUDIOVOX 0062 AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207 AWA 0200 BAIRD 0216 BANG & OLUFSEN 0205 BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 BASTIDE 0207 BAUR 0217 BEKO 0228 BELCOR 0060 AMSTRAD iii BELL & HOWELL 0058, 0064 BENQ 0051, 0081 BEON 0213, 0217 BESTAR 0213 BINATONE 0207 BLACK STAR 0214 BLAUPUNKT 0255 BLUE SKY 0209, 0218 BONDSTEC 0214 BOOTS 0207 BRADFORD 0062 BRANDT 0216, 0226 BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217 BRITANNIA 0200, 0207 BROCKWOOD 0060 BROKSONIC 0138 BRUNS 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 CANDLE 0060, 0061 CAPSONIC 0206 CASCADE 0208 CATHAY 0213, 0217 CCE 0127 CELEBRITY 0059 CENTURION 0213, 0217 CENTURY 0205 CGE 0214, 0215 CIMLINE 0208, 0218 CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 CITY 0208 CLARIVOX 0212, 0217 CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 COLORTYME 0060, 0061 CONCERTO 0060, 0061 CONCORDE 0208 CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213 CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208 CONTEC/CONY 0062 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0216 COSMEL 0208 CRAIG 0062 CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215 CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS ELECTRONICS 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 CYBERTRON 0209, 0218 DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 DAINICHI DANSAI DANTAX DAYTRON DE GRAAF DECCA DESMET DIAMOND DIMENSIA DIXI DTS DUAL DUAL-TEC DUMONT 0200, 0209, 0218 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 0217 0060, 0061, 0208 0210 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 0213, 0217 0200 0057 0208, 0213, 0217 0208 0207, 0215, 0216 0207, 0208, 0215 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 DURABRAND 0126 0217 0213, 0217 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 ELBE-SHARP 0204 ELCIT 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 ELECTROBAND 0059 ELECTROHOME 0059, 0060, 0061 ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218 ELMAN 0215 ELTA 0200, 0208 EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 ENVISION 0060, 0061 ERRES 0213, 0217 ESA 0080 ETRON 0208 EURO-FEEL 0206 EUROLINE 0217 EUROMAN 0200 EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213 EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 FENNER 0208 FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226 FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210 FINLANDIA 0210 FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 FLINT 0213, 0218 FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0200 FORTRESS 0205 FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 DUX DYNATRON ELBE FUTURETECH 0062 0094 0208, 0215, 0218 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215 GENERAL TECHNIC 0208 GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 GIBRALTER 0060 GOLDHAND 0200 GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 GRAETZ 0211 GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217 GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 GRUNPY 0062 HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207 HALLMARK 0060, 0061 HAMPTON 0200, 0207 HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 HANTAREX 0204, 0208 HARVARD 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 HIFIVOX 0216 HIGASHI 0200 HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 HISAWA 0209, 0218 HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 HORNYPHON 0213 HOSHAI 0209, 0218 HUANYU 0200, 0207 HYGASHI 0200, 0207 HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICES 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 INDIANA 0213, 0217 INFINITY 0063 INGELEN 0211 INGERSOL 0208 GATEWAY GBC GE INNO HIT MAGNADYNE 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207 MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 MAGNUM 0206, 0208 MAJESTIC 0058 MANDOR 0206 MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 MARELLI 0205 MARK 0200, 0213, 0217 MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 MEDIATOR 0213, 0217 MEDION 0206, 0208 MEGATRON 0061 MELECTRONIC 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 MEMPHIS 0208 METZ 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 MICROMAXX 0206, 0208 MICROSTAR 0206, 0208 MINERVA 0204 MINOKA 0213 MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 MONTGOMERY WARD 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 MULTI SYSTEM 0217 MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 MURPHY 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 NAONIS 0210 NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 NECKERMANN 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 NESCO 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 NEW TECH 0208, 0213 NEW WORLD 0209, 0218 NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207 NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 NIKKO 0061 NOBLIKO 0200, 0207 NOGAMATIC 0216 NOKIA 0129, 0211 NORDMENDE 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 NORDVISION 0217 OCEANIC 0211 OLEVIA ONCEAS ONWA ORBIT ORION 0052, 0084 0207 0062, 0218 0213 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 ORLINE 0218 ORSOWE 0204 OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 OSIO 0201 OSO 0209, 0218 OSUME 0218 OTTO VERSAND 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 PAEL 0200, 0207 PALLADIUM 0207 PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 PATHE CINEMA 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 PATHE MARCONI 0212, 0216 PAUSA 0208 PERDIO 0200 PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 PHILHARMONIC 0207 PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 0124 PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PILOT 0060 PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 PLANTRON 0206, 0213 POLAROID 0075 POPPY 0208 PORTLAND 0060, 0061 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0204, 0210 PRECISION 0207 PRIMA 0208, 0211 PROFEX 0208 PROFI-TRONIC 0213 PROLINE 0213 PROSCAN 0057 PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217 PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 PROTON 0060, 0061 PROVIEW 0050 PROVISION 0217 PULSAR 0060 PYE 0213, 0217 PYMI 0208 QUASAR 0152, 0214 QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 RADIALVA 0218 RADIO SHACK 0064 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 RADIOLA 0213, 0217 RADIOMARELLI 0204, 0205, 0214 RADIOTONE 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 REALISTIC 0064 REVOX 0213, 0217 REX 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 RHAPSODY 0200 R-LINE 0213, 0217 ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 ROBOTRON 0205 ROWA 0200 RTF 0205 SABA 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 SACCS 0212 SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 SAMBERS 0204 SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 SANDRA 0200, 0207 SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213 SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 SCOTCH 0061 SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062 iv APPENDIX 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 INNOVATION 0206, 0208 INTERBUY 0208, 0214 INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 INTERNATIONAL 0200 INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218 IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 ISUKAI 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 JENSEN 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 KAMOSONIC 0207 KAMP 0200, 0207 KAPSCH 0211 KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 KENDO 0128, 0210 KENNEDY 0215 KENWOOD 0060, 0061 KINGSLEY 0200, 0207 KLOSS NOVABEAM 0062 KNEISSEL 0203 KOLSTER 0213 KONKA 0209, 0218 KORPEL 0213, 0217 KORTING 0205 KOYODA 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 KYOTO 0200, 0212 LENCO 0208 LENOIR 0207, 0208 LESA 0214 LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217 LG 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 LIESENK 0217 LIFE 0206, 0208 LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218 LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217 LOGIK 0058 LUMA 0210, 0217 LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217 LUX MAY 0213 LUXMAN 0060, 0061 LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 MAG 0050 SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0211 SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215 SENCORA 0208 SENTRA 0218 SERINO 0200 SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 SHOGUN 0060 SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215 SICATEL 0212 SIEMENS 0255 SIERRA 0213 SIGNATURE 0058 SILVA 0200 SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215 SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 SKANTIC 0211 SOLAVOX 0211 SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 SONOLOR 0211 SONTEC 0213, 0217 SONY 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 SOUND & VISION 0209, 0218 SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062 SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 STARLIGHT 0217 STARLITE 0062 STENWAY 0218 STERN 0210, 0211 SUNKAI 0208, 0218 SUNWOOD 0208, 0213 SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207 SUPERTECH 0200 SUPRA 0208 SUPREME 0059 SUSUMU 0209 SUTRON 0208 SYDNEY 0200, 0207 SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080 SYSLINE 0217 SYTONG 0200 TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210 TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 TEAC 0127 TEC 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 TECHWOOD 0060, 0061 v TEKNIKA TELEAVIA TELECOR TELEFUNKEN 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 0216 0218 0065, 0213, 0216 TELEGAZI 0218 TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217 TELETON 0207 TELEVIDEON 0200 TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 TESMET 0213 TEVION 0206, 0208 TEXET 0200, 0207 THOMSON 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 THORN 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 TOKAI 0213 TOKYO 0200, 0207 TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 TOWADA 0211, 0215 TRANSTEC 0200 TRIDENT 0204 TRISTAR 0218 TRIUMPH 0204 UHER 0211, 0213 ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 UNITED 0217 UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 UNIVOX 0212 VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 VEXA 0208, 0217 VICTOR 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 VIDEOLOGIQUE 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 VIDEOSAT 0214 VIDEOSYSTEM 0213 VIDEOTECHNIC 0200 VIDTECH 0060, 0061 VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 VISIOLA 0200, 0207 VISION 0213 VORTEC 0213, 0217 VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 WALTHAM 0207, 0212 WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218 WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 WEGA 0205 WELTBLICK 0213, 0217 WESTON 0215 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0008, 0200, 0207, 0217 WINCOM 0055, 0056 YAMAHA YAMISHI YOKO YORX ZANUSSI ZENITH 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0005, 0060, 0061 0218 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 0209, 0218 0210 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD COMBO AIWA APEX BROKSONIC BUSH JVC PANASONIC RCA SYLVANIA THOMSON TOSHIBA 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 2054, 0254, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 2048, 0231, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR COMBO PANASONIC SAMSUNG SHARP SYLVANIA TOSHIBA 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR COMBO AIWA BUSH DAEWOO 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 GE 0147, 1030 GOODMANS 0240, 1069 GRUNDIG 0236, 1062 HITACHI 0156, 1039 JVC 0153, 1036 MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033 ORION 0235, 1065 PANASONIC 0151, 1034 PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 QUASAR 0152, 1035 RCA 0149, 1032 ROADSTAR 0237, 1066 SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 SHARP 0145, 1028 SONY 0234, 1064 SYLVANIA 0148, 1031 TATUNG 0237, 1066 TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 ZENITH 0154, 1037 DVD/VCR COMBO JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS RCA 1017, 1017, 2045, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025, 2046 1022, 2042 SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TOSHIBA ZENITH 1021, 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 VCR ADMIRAL 1008, 1013 ADVENTURA 1005 AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 AKAI 1007, 1043 AKIBA 1050 AKURA 1043, 1050 ALBA 1044, 1050 AMERICAN HIGH 1004 AMSTRAD 1042 ANITECH 1050 ASA 1045, 1046 ASHA 1002, 1014 ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 AUDIO DYNAMICS 1000 AUDIOVOX 1003 BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047 BASIC LINE 1044, 1050 BAUR 1046 BEAUMARK 1002, 1014 BELL & HOWELL 1001 BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048 BROKSONIC 1012, 1013 BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066 CALIX 1003 CANDLE 1002, 1003 CANON 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 CIMLINE 1044, 1050 CITIZEN 1002, 1003 COLORTYME 1000 COLT 1006 CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 CROWN 1050 CURTIS MATHES 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 CYBERNEX 1002, 1014 DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 DANSAI 1050 DANTAX 1044 DBX 1000 DE GRAAF 1046, 1049 DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046 DENON 1010 DIMENSIA 1009 DUAL 1043, 1046 DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 DYNATECH 1005 ELECTROHOME 1003 ELECTROPHONIC 1003 ELTA 1050 EMERSON KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 KODAK 1003, 1004 KORPEL 1050 LEYCO 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 LIFETEC 1044, 1048 LLOYD'S 1005 LOEWE 1048 LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046 LOGIK 1006, 1050 LUXOR 1047 LXI 1003 M ELECTRONIC 1042 MAGNASONIC 1047 MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033 MAGNIN 1003, 1014 MANESTH 1050 MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 MARTA 1003 MATSUI 1044, 1045 MATSUSHITA 1004 MEDIATOR 1046 MEDION 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 MEMPHIS 1050 METZ 1048 MGA 1014 MGN TECHNOLOGY 1002, 1014 MICROMAXX 1044, 1048 MICROSTAR 1044, 1048 MIGROS 1042 MINOLTA 1010 MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046 MONTGOMERY WARD 1008 MOTOROLA 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 MURPHY 1042 NATIONAL 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 NECKERMANN 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 NESCO 1050 NIKKO 1003 NOBLEX 1002, 1014 NOKIA 1043, 1047 NORDMENDE 1043 OCEANIC 1042, 1043 OKANO 1044 OLYMPUS 1004 OPTIMUS 1003, 1008 ORION 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 ORSON 1042 OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050 OTTO VERSAND 1046 PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050 PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 PATHE MARCONI 1043 PENNEY 1010, 1014 PENTAX 1010, 1049 PERDIO 1042 PHILCO 1004, 1051 PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 1018 PHONOLA 1046 PILOT 1003 PIONEER 1011, 1046 PRINZ 1042 PROFEX 1050 PROFITRONIC 1014 PROLINE 1042 PROSCAN 1009 PROSONIC 1044 PROTEC 1006 PYE 1046, 1056 QUARTER 1001 QUARTZ 1001, 1047 QUASAR 1004, 1035 QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047 RADIO SHACK 1003 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 RADIOLA 1046 RADIX 1003 RANDEX 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 REX 1043 RFT 1046 ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066 SABA 1043 SAISHO 1044, 1050 SALORA 1047 SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 SANKY 1008 SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 SCHAUB LORENZ 1042, 1043, 1047 SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 SCOTT 1012 SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-SINUDYNE 1046 SELECO 1043 SENTRON 1050 SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050 SHIVAKI 1045 SHOGUN 1002, 1014 SIEMENS 1045, 1047 SIGNATURE 2000 1008 SILVA 1045 SINGER 1004, 1006 SINUDYNE 1046 SONTEC 1045 SONY 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 SUNKAI 1044 SUNSTAR 1042 SUNTRONIC 1042 SUNWOOD 1050 SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 SYMPHONIC 1005 TAISHO 1044 TANDY 1001 TASHIKO 1003, 1042 TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 TEAC 1005, 1007 TECHNICS 1004, 1048 TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005 TELEAVIA 1043 TELEFUNKEN 1043 TENOSAL 1050 TENSAI 1042, 1045, 1050 TEVION 1044, 1048 THOMSON 1043, 1058 THORN 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 TOKAI 1045, 1050 TONSAI 1050 TOSHIBA 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014 TOWADA 1050 TOWIKA 1050 UHER 1045 UNITECH 1002, 1014 UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046 VECTOR RESEARCH 1000 VIDEO CONCEPTS 1000 VIDEON 1044, 1048 VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014 WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 WELTBLICK 1045 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007 YAMISHI 1050 YOKAN 1050 YOKO 1045, 1050 ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037 DVD ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 2078 AIWA 2055, 2100 AKAI 2096 AKURA 2076 ALBA 2078, 2086 APEX 2027, 2049 AWA 2078 vi APPENDIX 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 ETZUKO 1050 FERGUSON 1043 FIDELITY 1042 FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049 FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 FISHER 1001, 1047 FLINT 1044 FORMENTI/PHOENIX 1046 FUJI 1004 FUJITSU 1042 FUNAI 1005, 1042 GALAXY 1042 GARRARD 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 GELOSO 1050 GENERAL TECHNIC 1044, 1048 GO VIDEO 1014 GOLDHAND 1050 GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 GRADIENTE 1005 GRAETZ 1043, 1047 GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049 GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050 GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062 HANSEATIC 1045, 1046 HARLEY DAVIDSON 1005 HARMAN/KARDON 1000 HARWOOD 1006 HCM 1050 HEADQUARTER 1001 HINARI 1044, 1050 HISAWA 1044 HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 1010 HYPSON 1044, 1050 IMPERIAL 1042 INNO HIT 1046, 1050 INNOVATION 1044, 1048 INSTANT REPLAY 1004 INTERBUY 1045 INTERFUNK 1046, 1047 INTERVISION 1042 IRRADIO 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 JENSEN 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 KAISUI 1050 KARCHER 1046 KENDO 1044 AXION BRAINWAVE BRANDT BROKSONIC BUSH CENTREX CLASSIC CLATRONIC COBY C-TECH CYBERHOME 2078 2096 2073, 2085 2060 2075, 2078, 2112 2077 2078 2075 2078 2074 2025, 2079, 2091 DAEWOO 2092, 2098 DANSAI 2096 DAYTEK 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 DENON 2030, 2102, 2103 DENVER 2075, 2076 DIAMOND 2074 DK DIGITAL 2094 DUAL 2078 D-VISION 2096 DVX 2074 ELTA 2096 EUROLINE 2096 FUNAI 2052, 2058 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 2074 GLOBAL SPHERE 2074 GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078 GRUNDIG 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 HAAZ 2074 HE 2078 HITACHI 2032, 2072 HOME ELECTRONICS 2078 INNOVATION 2072 IRRADIO 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 KENWOOD 2030, 2097 KINGAVON 2075 KODA 2075 LAWSON 2074 LENCO 2075 LG 2084, 2087 LIFETEC 2072 LIMIT 2074 LOGICLAB 2074 LUXOR 2077 MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075 MAGNUM 2072 MBO 2078 MEDION 2072 MICROMAXX 2072 MICROMEDIA 2073 MICROSTAR 2072 MITSUBISHI 2035 MIZUDA 2075 MUSTEK 2078 NAIKO 2077 ONKYO 2073, 2135 ORAVA P&B PACIFIC PANASONIC 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 PIONEER 2036, 2082 PROLINE 2077 PROVISION 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 RED STAR 2076 REOC 2074 ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086 ROWA 2077 SABA 2085 SABAKI 2074 SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 SANSUI 2074 SANYO 2095 SCANMAGIC 2078 SCIENTIFIC LABS 2074 SCOTT 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 SILVA 2076 SINGER 2074 SKYMASTER 2074, 2078 SKYWORTH 2076 SM ELECTRONIC 2074, 2078 SONY 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 SOUNDMASTER 2074 SOUNDMAX 2074 STANDARD 2074 STAR CLUSTER 2074 STARMEDIA 2075 SUPERVISION 2074, 2078 SYLVANIA 2052, 2058 SYNN 2074 TCM 2072 TEAC 2074 TEC 2076 TECHNICS 2030 TECHNIKA 2096 TECHNOSONIC 2096 TEVION 2072, 2074 THOMSON 2085, 2109 TOKAI 2076 TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 UNITED 2078 VOXSON 2078 WHARFEDALE 2074 XLOGIC 2074 YAKUMO 2077 YAMADA YAMAHA YUKAI ZENITH 2077 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD-DVR PANASONIC PIONEER SAMSUNG TOSHIBA 2067 2114 2115 2068 DVD/LD COMBO PIONEER 2036 DVD RECORDER APEX JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TOSHIBA YAMAHA YUKAI 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 NIVEUS MEDIA 2132 NORTHGATE 2132 PANASONIC 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014 PROSCAN 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120 SHARP 2009, 2010 SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120 SONY 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 STACK 9 2132 SYSTEMAX 2132 TAGAR SYSTEMS 2132 TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132 TOUCH 2132 ULTIMATETV 2133 VIEWSONIC 2132 VOODOO 2132 YAMAHA 2011 ZT GROUP 2132 LD PLAYER YAMAHA 2002 DVR ABS 2132 ALIENWARE 2132 CYBERPOWER 2132 DELL 2132 DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH NETWORK 2126, 2127 DISHPRO 2126 ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127 EXPRESSVU 2126 GATEWAY 2132 GOI 2126 HEWLETT PACKARD 2132 HITACHI 2008 HOWARD COMPUTERS 2132 HTS 2126 HUGHES 2123, 2128 HUMAX 2123 HUSH 2132 IBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 LINKSYS 2132 MEDIA CENTER PC 2132 MICROSOFT 2132 MIND 2132 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA CD PLAYER YAMAHA 5000, 5013 CD RECORDER YAMAHA 5001 MD YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK YAMAHA 5005, 5006 TUNER YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 5011 All rights reserved. Printed in China WK65660 1 SILENT CINEMA PHONES STANDBY /ON 9 SPEAKERS A/B/OFF ■ Front panel/Face avant 3 0 TONE CONTROL EDIT PRESET/TUNING 2 l FM/AM A h 1 A/B/C/D/E PROGRAM 4 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. 00_Sheet_HTR-6025_UC.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 2, 2007 2:31 PM NIGHT 3 PRESET/TUNING B C EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 SCENE l 5 l 4 h D INPUT h MEMORY 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN'L E F AUDIO SELECT 6 VIDEO L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX VOLUME PORTABLE 8 HTR-6025 UC 00_Sheet_HTR-6025_UC.book Page i Wednesday, May 2, 2007 2:31 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande X A B C POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL L M N O V-AUX AMP D E F SCENE 1 BAND LEVEL TITLE G H 2 3 MENU 4 VOLUME Q ENTER R DISPLAY RETURN P REC I J K l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 8 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 ENT S T U V W Printed in China WK65680-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-6025 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-6025 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-6025 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-6025 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha HTR-6025 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6025 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha HTR-6025 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-6025 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-6025 Omistajan opas
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-6025 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-6025 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6025 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha HTR-6025 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-6025 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha HTR-6230BL de handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V461 - AV Receiver Handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V563 de handleiding
-
-